Release v2.3-beta2

.gitattributes

@@ -1,5 +1 @@
 *.sh text eol=lf
-# Treat compiled JS/CSS files as binary, as they're not meant to be human-readable
-netbox/project-static/dist/*.css binary
-netbox/project-static/dist/*.js binary
-netbox/project-static/dist/*.js.map binary

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<!--
+    Before opening a new issue, please search through the existing issues to
+    see if your topic has already been addressed. Note that you may need to
+    remove the "is:open" filter from the search bar to include closed issues.
+
+    Check the appropriate type for your issue below by placing an x between the
+    brackets. For assistance with installation issues, or for any other issues
+    other than those listed below, please raise your topic for discussion on
+    our mailing list:
+
+        https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss
+
+    Please note that issues which do not fall under any of the below categories
+    will be closed. Due to an excessive backlog of feature requests, we are
+    not currently accepting any proposals which extend NetBox's feature scope.
+
+    Do not prepend any sort of tag to your issue's title. An administrator will
+    review your issue and assign labels as appropriate.
+--->
+### Issue type
+[ ] Feature request <!-- An enhancement of existing functionality -->
+[ ] Bug report      <!-- Unexpected or erroneous behavior -->
+[ ] Documentation   <!-- A modification to the documentation -->
+
+<!--
+    Please describe the environment in which you are running NetBox. (Be sure
+    to verify that you are running the latest stable release of NetBox before
+    submitting a bug report.) If you are submitting a bug report and have made
+    any changes to the code base, please first validate that your bug can be
+    recreated while running an official release.
+-->
+### Environment
+* Python version:  <!-- Example: 3.5.4 -->
+* NetBox version:  <!-- Example: 2.1.3 -->
+
+<!--
+    BUG REPORTS must include:
+        * A list of the steps needed for someone else to reproduce the bug
+        * A description of the expected and observed behavior
+        * Any relevant error messages (screenshots may also help)
+
+    FEATURE REQUESTS must include:
+        * A detailed description of the proposed functionality
+        * A use case for the new feature
+        * A rough description of any necessary changes to the database schema
+        * Any relevant third-party libraries which would be needed
+-->
+### Description

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/01-feature_request.yaml

@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-name: ✨ Feature Request
-type: Feature
-description: Propose a new NetBox feature or enhancement
-labels: ["netbox", "type: feature", "status: needs triage"]
-body:
-  - type: markdown
-    attributes:
-      value: >
-        **NOTE:** This form is only for submitting well-formed proposals to extend or modify
-        NetBox in some way. If you're trying to solve a problem but can't figure out how, or if
-        you still need time to work on the details of a proposed new feature, please start a
-        [discussion](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) instead.
-  - type: input
-    attributes:
-      label: NetBox version
-      description: What version of NetBox are you currently running?
-      placeholder: v4.4.9
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: Feature type
-      options:
-        - Data model extension
-        - New functionality
-        - Change to existing functionality
-        - Other
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Proposed functionality
-      description: >
-        Describe in detail the new feature or behavior you are proposing. Include any specific changes
-        to work flows, data models, and/or the user interface. The more detail you provide here, the
-        greater chance your proposal has of being discussed. Feature requests which don't include an
-        actionable implementation plan will be rejected.
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Use case
-      description: >
-        Explain how adding this functionality would benefit NetBox users. What need does it address?
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Database changes
-      description: >
-        Note any changes to the database schema necessary to support the new feature. For example,
-        does the proposal require adding a new model or field? (Not all new features require database
-        changes.)
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: External dependencies
-      description: >
-        List any new dependencies on external libraries or services that this new feature would
-        introduce. For example, does the proposal require the installation of a new Python package?
-        (Not all new features introduce new dependencies.)

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/02-bug_report.yaml

@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-name: 🐛 Bug Report
-type: Bug
-description: Report a reproducible bug in the current release of NetBox
-labels: ["netbox", "type: bug", "status: needs triage"]
-body:
-  - type: markdown
-    attributes:
-      value: >
-        **NOTE:** This form is only for reporting _reproducible bugs_ in a current NetBox
-        release. If you're having trouble with installation or just looking for assistance
-        using NetBox, please visit our
-        [discussion forum](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) instead.
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: NetBox Edition
-      description: >
-        Users of [NetBox Cloud](https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-cloud/) or
-        [NetBox Enterprise](https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-enterprise/), please contact the
-        [NetBox Labs](https://netboxlabs.com/) support team for assistance to ensure your
-        request receives immediate attention.
-      options:
-        - NetBox Community
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: input
-    attributes:
-      label: NetBox Version
-      description: What version of NetBox are you currently running?
-      placeholder: v4.4.9
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: Python Version
-      description: What version of Python are you currently running?
-      options:
-        - "3.10"
-        - "3.11"
-        - "3.12"
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Steps to Reproduce
-      description: >
-        Describe in detail the exact steps that someone else can take to
-        reproduce this bug using the current stable release of NetBox. Begin with the
-        creation of any necessary database objects and call out every operation being
-        performed explicitly. If reporting a bug in the REST API, be sure to reconstruct
-        the raw HTTP request(s) being made: Don't rely on a client library such as
-        pynetbox. Additionally, **do not rely on the demo instance** for reproducing
-        suspected bugs, as its data is prone to modification or deletion at any time.
-      placeholder: |
-        1. Click on "create widget"
-        2. Set foo to 12 and bar to G
-        3. Click the "create" button
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Expected Behavior
-      description: What did you expect to happen?
-      placeholder: A new widget should have been created with the specified attributes
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Observed Behavior
-      description: What happened instead?
-      placeholder: A TypeError exception was raised
-    validations:
-      required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/03-documentation_change.yaml

@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-name: 📖 Documentation Change
-type: Documentation
-description: Suggest an addition or modification to the NetBox documentation
-labels: ["netbox", "type: documentation", "status: needs triage"]
-body:
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: Change Type
-      description: What type of change are you proposing?
-      options:
-        - Addition
-        - Correction
-        - Removal
-        - Cleanup (formatting, typos, etc.)
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: Area
-      description: To what section of the documentation does this change primarily pertain?
-      options:
-        - Features
-        - Installation/upgrade
-        - Getting started
-        - Configuration
-        - Customization
-        - Best practices
-        - Integrations/API
-        - Plugins
-        - Administration
-        - Data model
-        - Reference
-        - Development
-        - Other
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Proposed Changes
-      description: Describe the proposed changes and why they are necessary.
-    validations:
-      required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/04-translation.yaml

@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
----
-name: 🌍 Translation
-type: Translation
-description: Request support for a new language in the user interface
-labels: ["netbox", "type: translation"]
-body:
-  - type: markdown
-    attributes:
-      value: >
-        **NOTE:** This template is used only for proposing the addition of *new* languages. Please do
-        not use it to request changes to existing translations.
-  - type: input
-    attributes:
-      label: Language
-      description: What is the name of the language in English?
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: input
-    attributes:
-      label: ISO 639-1 code
-      description: >
-        What is the two-letter [ISO 639-1 code](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes)
-        assigned to the language?
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: dropdown
-    attributes:
-      label: Volunteer
-      description: Are you a fluent speaker of this language **and** willing to contribute a translation map?
-      options:
-        - "Yes"
-        - "No"
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Comments
-      description: Any other notes you would like to share

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/05-housekeeping.yaml

@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
----
-name: 🏡 Housekeeping
-type: Housekeeping
-description: A change pertaining to the codebase itself (developers only)
-labels: ["netbox", "type: housekeeping"]
-body:
-  - type: markdown
-    attributes:
-      value: >
-        **NOTE:** This template is for use by maintainers only. Please do not submit
-        an issue using this template unless you have been specifically asked to do so.
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Proposed Changes
-      description: >
-        Describe in detail the new feature or behavior you'd like to propose.
-        Include any specific changes to work flows, data models, or the user interface.
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Justification
-      description: Please provide justification for the proposed change(s).
-    validations:
-      required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/06-deprecation.yaml

@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
----
-name: 🗑️ Deprecation
-type: Deprecation
-description: The removal of an existing feature or resource
-labels: ["netbox", "type: deprecation"]
-body:
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Proposed Changes
-      description: >
-        Describe in detail the proposed changes. What is being removed?
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Justification
-      description: Please provide justification for the proposed change(s).
-    validations:
-      required: true
-  - type: textarea
-    attributes:
-      label: Impact
-      description: List all areas of the application that will be affected by this change.
-    validations:
-      required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/config.yml

@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-# Reference: https://help.github.com/en/github/building-a-strong-community/configuring-issue-templates-for-your-repository#configuring-the-template-chooser
-blank_issues_enabled: false
-contact_links:
-  - name: 📖 Contributing Policy
-    url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md
-    about: "Please read through our contributing policy before opening an issue or pull request."
-  - name: ❓ Discussion
-    url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions
-    about: "If you're just looking for help, try starting a discussion instead."
-  - name: 👔 Professional Support
-    url: https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-enterprise/
-    about: "Professional support is available for NetBox Enterprise or Cloud."
-  - name: 🌎 Correct a Translation
-    url: https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/
-    about: "Spot an incorrect translation? You can propose a fix on Transifex."
-  - name: 💬 Community Slack
-    url: https://netdev.chat
-    about: "Join #netbox on the NetDev Community Slack for assistance with installation issues and other problems."

.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -1,16 +1,13 @@
 <!--
-    Thank you for your interest in contributing to NetBox! Please note that
-    our contribution policy requires that a feature request or bug report be
-    approved and assigned prior to opening a pull request. This helps avoid
-    waste time and effort on a proposed change that we might not be able to
-    accept.
+    Thank you for your interest in contributing to NetBox! Please note
+    that our contribution policy requires that a feature request or bug
+    report be opened for approval prior to filing a pull request. This
+    helps avoid wasting time and effort on something that we might not
+    be able to accept.
 
-    IF YOUR PULL REQUEST DOES NOT REFERENCE AN ISSUE WHICH HAS BEEN ASSIGNED
-    TO YOU, IT WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY.
-
-    Please specify your assigned issue number on the line below.
+    Please indicate the relevant feature request or bug report below.
 -->
-### Fixes: #1234
+### Fixes:
 
 <!--
     Please include a summary of the proposed changes below.

.github/codeql/codeql-config.yml

@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-paths-ignore:
-  # Ignore compiled JS
-  - netbox/project-static/dist
-
-query-filters:
-  # Exclude py/url-redirection: NetBox uses safe_for_redirect() wrapper function
-  # which validates all redirects via Django's url_has_allowed_host_and_scheme().
-  # CodeQL's taint tracking doesn't recognize wrapper functions without custom
-  # query configuration. See #20484.
-  - exclude:
-      id: py/url-redirection

.github/workflows/ci.yml

@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-name: CI
-
-on:
-  push:
-    paths-ignore:
-      - '.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/**'
-      - '.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md'
-      - 'contrib/**'
-      - 'docs/**'
-      - 'netbox/translations/**'
-  pull_request:
-    paths-ignore:
-      - '.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/**'
-      - '.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md'
-      - 'contrib/**'
-      - 'docs/**'
-      - 'netbox/translations/**'
-
-permissions:
-  contents: read
-
-# Add concurrency group to control job running
-concurrency:
-  group: ${{ github.event_name }}-${{ github.ref }}-${{ github.actor }}
-  cancel-in-progress: true
-
-jobs:
-  build:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    env:
-      NETBOX_CONFIGURATION: netbox.configuration_testing
-    strategy:
-      matrix:
-        python-version: ['3.10', '3.11', '3.12']
-        node-version: ['20.x']
-    services:
-      redis:
-        image: redis
-        ports:
-          - 6379:6379
-      postgres:
-        image: postgres
-        env:
-          POSTGRES_USER: netbox
-          POSTGRES_PASSWORD: netbox
-        options: >-
-          --health-cmd pg_isready
-          --health-interval 10s
-          --health-timeout 5s
-          --health-retries 5
-        ports:
-          - 5432:5432
-
-    steps:
-    - name: Check out repo
-      uses: actions/checkout@v4
-
-    - name: Set up Python ${{ matrix.python-version }}
-      uses: actions/setup-python@v5
-      with:
-        python-version: ${{ matrix.python-version }}
-
-    - name: Use Node.js ${{ matrix.node-version }}
-      uses: actions/setup-node@v4
-      with:
-        node-version: ${{ matrix.node-version }}
-    
-    - name: Install Yarn Package Manager
-      run: npm install -g yarn
-    
-    - name: Setup Node.js with Yarn Caching
-      uses: actions/setup-node@v4
-      with:
-        node-version: ${{ matrix.node-version }}
-        cache: yarn
-        cache-dependency-path: netbox/project-static/yarn.lock
-    
-    - name: Install Frontend Dependencies
-      run: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static
-
-    - name: Install dependencies & set up configuration
-      run: |
-        python -m pip install --upgrade pip
-        pip install -r requirements.txt
-        pip install ruff coverage tblib
-
-    - name: Build documentation
-      run: mkdocs build
-
-    - name: Collect static files
-      run: python netbox/manage.py collectstatic --no-input
-
-    - name: Check for missing migrations
-      run: python netbox/manage.py makemigrations --check
-
-    - name: Check PEP8 compliance
-      run: ruff check netbox/
-
-    - name: Check UI ESLint, TypeScript, and Prettier Compliance
-      run: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static validate
-    
-    - name: Validate Static Asset Integrity
-      run: scripts/verify-bundles.sh
-
-    - name: Run tests
-      run: coverage run --source="netbox/" netbox/manage.py test netbox/ --parallel
-
-    - name: Show coverage report
-      run: coverage report --skip-covered --omit '*/migrations/*,*/tests/*'

.github/workflows/close-incomplete-issues.yml

@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-# close-stale-issues (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/close-stale-issues)
-name: Close incomplete issues
-
-on:
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '15 4 * * *'
-  workflow_dispatch:
-
-permissions:
-  actions: write
-  issues: write
-
-jobs:
-  stale:
-    if: github.repository == 'netbox-community/netbox'
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    steps:
-      - uses: actions/stale@v9
-        with:
-          close-issue-message: >
-            This issue is being closed as no further information has been provided. If
-            you would like to revisit this topic, please first modify your original post
-            to include all the requested detail, and then ask that the issue be reopened.
-          days-before-stale: 7
-          days-before-close: 7
-          only-issue-labels: 'status: revisions needed'
-          operations-per-run: 100
-          remove-stale-when-updated: false
-          stale-issue-label: 'pending closure'
-          stale-issue-message: >
-            This is a reminder that additional information is needed in order to further
-            triage this issue. If the requested details are not provided, the issue will
-            soon be closed automatically.

.github/workflows/close-stale-issues.yml

@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-# close-stale-issues (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/close-stale-issues)
-name: Close stale issues/PRs
-
-on:
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '0 4 * * *'
-  workflow_dispatch:
-
-permissions:
-  actions: write
-  issues: write
-  pull-requests: write
-
-jobs:
-  stale:
-    if: github.repository == 'netbox-community/netbox'
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    steps:
-      - uses: actions/stale@v9
-        with:
-          # General parameters
-          operations-per-run: 200
-          remove-stale-when-updated: false
-
-          # Issue parameters
-          close-issue-message: >
-            This issue has been automatically closed due to lack of activity. In an
-            effort to reduce noise, please do not comment any further. Note that the
-            core maintainers may elect to reopen this issue at a later date if deemed
-            necessary.
-          days-before-issue-stale: 90
-          days-before-issue-close: 30
-          exempt-issue-labels: 'status: accepted,status: backlog,status: blocked'
-          stale-issue-label: 'pending closure'
-          stale-issue-message: >
-            This issue has been automatically marked as stale because it has not had
-            recent activity. It will be closed if no further activity occurs. NetBox
-            is governed by a small group of core maintainers which means not all opened
-            issues may receive direct feedback. **Do not** attempt to circumvent this
-            process by "bumping" the issue; doing so will result in its immediate closure
-            and you may be barred from participating in any future discussions. Please see
-            our [contributing guide](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
-
-          # Pull request parameters
-          close-pr-message: >
-            This PR has been automatically closed due to lack of activity.
-          days-before-pr-stale: 30
-          days-before-pr-close: 15
-          exempt-pr-labels: 'status: blocked'
-          stale-pr-label: 'pending closure'
-          stale-pr-message: >
-            This PR has been automatically marked as stale because it has not had
-            recent activity. It will be closed automatically if no further action is
-            taken.

.github/workflows/codeql.yml

@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-name: "CodeQL"
-
-on:
-  push:
-    branches: [ "main", "feature" ]
-  pull_request:
-    branches: [ "main", "feature" ]
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '38 16 * * 4'
-
-jobs:
-  analyze:
-    name: Analyze (${{ matrix.language }})
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    permissions:
-      security-events: write
-
-    strategy:
-      fail-fast: false
-      matrix:
-        include:
-        - language: actions
-          build-mode: none
-        - language: javascript-typescript
-          build-mode: none
-        - language: python
-          build-mode: none
-    steps:
-    - name: Checkout repository
-      uses: actions/checkout@v4
-
-    - name: Initialize CodeQL
-      uses: github/codeql-action/init@v3
-      with:
-        languages: ${{ matrix.language }}
-        build-mode: ${{ matrix.build-mode }}
-        config-file: .github/codeql/codeql-config.yml
-
-    - name: Perform CodeQL Analysis
-      uses: github/codeql-action/analyze@v3
-      with:
-        category: "/language:${{matrix.language}}"

.github/workflows/lock-threads.yml

@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-# lock-threads (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/lock-threads)
-name: Lock threads
-
-on:
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '0 3 * * *'
-  workflow_dispatch:
-
-permissions:
-  issues: write
-  pull-requests: write
-  discussions: write
-
-jobs:
-  lock:
-    if: github.repository == 'netbox-community/netbox'
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    steps:
-      - uses: dessant/lock-threads@1bf7ec25051fe7c00bdd17e6a7cf3d7bfb7dc771 # v5.0.1
-        with:
-          issue-inactive-days: 90
-          pr-inactive-days: 30
-          discussion-inactive-days: 180
-          issue-lock-reason: 'resolved'

.github/workflows/update-translation-strings.yml

@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-name: Update translation strings
-
-on:
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '0 5 * * *'
-  workflow_dispatch:
-
-permissions:
-  contents: write
-
-env:
-  LOCALE: "en"
-
-jobs:
-  makemessages:
-    if: github.repository == 'netbox-community/netbox'
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    env:
-      NETBOX_CONFIGURATION: netbox.configuration_testing
-
-    steps:
-    - name: Create app token
-      uses: actions/create-github-app-token@v1
-      id: app-token
-      with:
-        app-id: 1076524
-        private-key: ${{ secrets.HOUSEKEEPING_SECRET_KEY }}
-
-    - name: Check out repo
-      uses: actions/checkout@v4
-      with:
-          token: ${{ steps.app-token.outputs.token }}
-
-    - name: Set up Python
-      uses: actions/setup-python@v5
-      with:
-        python-version: 3.11
-
-    - name: Install system dependencies
-      run: sudo apt install -y gettext
-
-    - name: Install Python dependencies
-      run: |
-        python -m pip install --upgrade pip
-        pip install -r requirements.txt
-
-    - name: Run makemessages
-      run: python netbox/manage.py makemessages -l ${{ env.LOCALE }}
-
-    - name: Commit changes
-      uses: EndBug/add-and-commit@a94899bca583c204427a224a7af87c02f9b325d5 # v9.1.4
-      with:
-        add: 'netbox/translations/'
-        default_author: github_actions
-        message: 'Update source translation strings'

.gitignore

@@ -1,32 +1,12 @@
 *.pyc
-*.swp
-npm-debug.log*
-yarn-debug.log*
-yarn-error.log*
-/netbox/project-static/node_modules
-/netbox/project-static/docs/*
-!/netbox/project-static/docs/.info
 /netbox/netbox/configuration.py
 /netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py
-/netbox/local/*
-/netbox/media
 /netbox/reports/*
 !/netbox/reports/__init__.py
-/netbox/scripts/*
-!/netbox/scripts/__init__.py
 /netbox/static
-/venv/
+.idea
 /*.sh
-local_requirements.txt
-local_settings.py
 !upgrade.sh
 fabfile.py
-gunicorn.py
-uwsgi.ini
-netbox.log
-netbox.pid
-.DS_Store
-.idea
-.coverage
-.vscode
-.python-version
+*.swp
+gunicorn_config.py

.pre-commit-config.yaml

@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-repos:
-- repo: https://github.com/astral-sh/ruff-pre-commit
-  rev: v0.14.1
-  hooks:
-    - id: ruff
-      name: "Ruff linter"
-      args: [ netbox/ ]
-- repo: local
-  hooks:
-    - id: django-check
-      name: "Django system check"
-      description: "Run Django's internal check for common problems"
-      entry: python netbox/manage.py check
-      language: system
-      pass_filenames: false
-      types: [python]
-    - id: django-makemigrations
-      name: "Django migrations check"
-      description: "Check for any missing Django migrations"
-      entry: python netbox/manage.py makemigrations --check
-      language: system
-      pass_filenames: false
-      types: [python]
-    - id: mkdocs-build
-      name: "Build documentation"
-      description: "Build the documentation with mkdocs"
-      files: 'docs/'
-      entry: mkdocs build
-      language: system
-      pass_filenames: false
-    - id: yarn-validate
-      name: "Yarn validate"
-      description: "Check UI ESLint, TypeScript, and Prettier compliance"
-      files: 'netbox/project-static/'
-      entry: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static validate
-      language: system
-      pass_filenames: false
-    - id: verify-bundles
-      name: "Verify static asset bundles"
-      description: "Ensure that any modified static assets have been compiled"
-      files: 'netbox/project-static/'
-      entry: scripts/verify-bundles.sh
-      language: system
-      pass_filenames: false

.readthedocs.yaml

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-version: 2
-build:
-  os: ubuntu-22.04
-  tools:
-    python: "3.12"
-mkdocs:
-  configuration: mkdocs.yml
-python:
-   install:
-   - requirements: requirements.txt

.travis.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+sudo: required
+services:
+  - postgresql
+addons:
+  postgresql: "9.4"
+language: python
+python:
+  - "2.7"
+  - "3.5"
+install:
+  - pip install -r requirements.txt
+  - pip install pep8
+before_script:
+  - psql --version
+  - psql -U postgres -c 'SELECT version();'
+script:
+  - ./scripts/cibuild.sh

.tx/config

@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-[main]
-host = https://app.transifex.com
-
-[o:netbox-community:p:netbox:r:034999968a7366ba27a8bdf1ab63bf42]
-file_filter            = netbox/translations/<lang>/LC_MESSAGES/django.po
-source_file            = netbox/translations/en/LC_MESSAGES/django.po
-type                   = PO
-minimum_perc           = 0
-resource_name          = django.po
-replace_edited_strings = false
-keep_translations      = false
-

CHANGELOG.md

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-The changelog has been moved to the [project release notes](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/release-notes/).

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -1,122 +1,117 @@
-**Looking for help?** NetBox has a vast, active community of fellow users that may be able to provide assistance. Just [start a discussion](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions/new) right here on GitHub! Or if you'd prefer to chat, join us live in the `#netbox` channel on the [NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/)!
+## Getting Help
 
-<div align="center">
-  <h3>
-    :bug: <a href="#bug-reporting-bugs">Report a bug</a> &middot;
-    :bulb: <a href="#bulb-feature-requests">Suggest a feature</a> &middot;
-    :arrow_heading_up: <a href="#arrow_heading_up-submitting-pull-requests">Submit a pull request</a>
-  </h3>
-  <h3>
-    :jigsaw: <a href="#jigsaw-creating-plugins">Create a plugin</a> &middot;
-    :briefcase: <a href="#briefcase-looking-for-a-job">Work with us!</a> &middot;
-    :heart: <a href="#heart-other-ways-to-contribute">Other ideas</a>
-  </h3>
-</div>
-<h3></h3>
+If you encounter any issues installing or using NetBox, try one of the
+following resources to get assistance. Please **do not** open a GitHub issue
+except to report bugs or request features.
 
-## :information_source: Welcome to the Stadium!
+### Mailing List
 
-In her book [Working in Public](https://www.amazon.com/Working-Public-Making-Maintenance-Software/dp/0578675862), Nadia Eghbal defines four production models for open source projects, categorized by contributor and user growth: federations, clubs, toys, and stadiums. The NetBox project fits her definition of a stadium very well:
+We have established a Google Groups Mailing List for issues and general
+discussion. This is the best forum for obtaining assistance with NetBox
+installation. You can find us [here](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss).
 
-> Stadiums are projects with low contributor growth and high user growth. While they may receive casual contributions, their regular contributor base does not grow proportionately to their users. As a result, they tend to be powered by one or a few developers.
+### Slack
 
-The bulk of NetBox's development is carried out by a handful of core maintainers, with occasional contributions from collaborators in the community. We find the stadium analogy very useful in conveying the roles and obligations of both contributors and users.
+For real-time discussion, you can join the #netbox Slack channel on [NetworkToCode](https://slack.networktocode.com/).
 
-If you're a contributor, actively working on the center stage, you have an obligation to produce quality content that will benefit the project as a whole. Conversely, if you're in the audience consuming the work being produced, you have the option of making requests and suggestions, but must also recognize that contributors are under no obligation to act on them.
+## Reporting Bugs
 
-NetBox users are welcome to participate in either role, on stage or in the crowd. We ask only that you acknowledge the role you've chosen and respect the roles of others.
+* First, ensure that you've installed the [latest stable version](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases)
+of NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's possible that the bug has
+already been fixed.
 
-### General Tips for Working on GitHub
+* Next, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/issues)
+to see if the bug you've found has already been reported. If you think you may
+be experiencing a reported issue that hasn't already been resolved, please
+click "add a reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs
+up (+1). You mightalso want to add a comment describing how it's affecting your
+installation. This will allow us to prioritize bugs based on how many users are
+affected.
 
-* Register for a free [GitHub account](https://github.com/signup) if you haven't already.
-* You can use [GitHub Markdown](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/writing-on-github/getting-started-with-writing-and-formatting-on-github/basic-writing-and-formatting-syntax) for formatting text and adding images.
-* To help mitigate notification spam, please avoid "bumping" issues with no activity. (To vote an issue up or down, use a :thumbsup: or :thumbsdown: reaction.)
-* Please avoid pinging members with `@` unless they've previously expressed interest or involvement with that particular issue.
-* Familiarize yourself with [this list of discussion anti-patterns](https://github.com/bradfitz/issue-tracker-behaviors) and make every effort to avoid them.
+* If you haven't found an existing issue that describes your suspected bug,
+please inquire about it on the mailing list. **Do not** file an issue until you
+have received confirmation that it is in fact a bug. Invalid issues are very
+distracting and slow the pace at which NetBox is developed.
 
-## :bug: Reporting Bugs
+* When submitting an issue, please be as descriptive as possible. Be sure to
+include:
 
-:warning: Bug reports are used to call attention to some unintended or unexpected behavior in NetBox, such as when an error occurs or when the result of taking some action is inconsistent with the documentation. **Bug reports may not be used to suggest new functionality**; please see "feature requests" below if that is your goal.
+    * The environment in which NetBox is running
+    * The exact steps that can be taken to reproduce the issue (if applicable)
+    * Any error messages generated
+    * Screenshots (if applicable)
 
-* First, ensure that you're running the [latest stable version](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases) of NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's likely that the bug has already been fixed.
+* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Bug]") to the issue title.
+The issue will be reviewed by a moderator after submission and the appropriate
+labels will be applied for categorization.
 
-* Next, search our [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues?q=is%3Aissue) to see if the bug you've found has already been reported. If you come across a bug report that seems to match, please click "add a reaction" in the bottom left corner of the issue and add a thumbs up ( :thumbsup: ). This will help draw more attention to it. Any comments you can add to provide additional information or context would also be much appreciated.
+* Keep in mind that we prioritize bugs based on their severity and how much
+work is required to resolve them. It may take some time for someone to address
+your issue.
 
-* If you can't find any existing issues (open or closed) that seem to match yours, you're welcome to [submit a new bug report](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?label=type%3A+bug&template=bug_report.yaml). Be sure to complete the entire report template, including detailed steps that someone triaging your issue can follow to confirm the reported behavior. (If we're not able to replicate the bug based on the information provided, we'll ask for additional detail.)
+## Feature Requests
 
-* Some other tips to keep in mind:
-  * Error messages and screenshots are especially helpful.
-  * Don't prepend your issue title with a label like `[Bug]`; the proper label will be assigned automatically.
-  * Ensure that your reproduction instructions don't reference data in our [demo instance](https://demo.netbox.dev/), which gets rebuilt nightly.
-  * Verify that you have GitHub notifications enabled and are subscribed to your issue after submitting.
-  * We appreciate your patience as bugs are prioritized by their severity, impact, and difficulty to resolve.
+* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/issues)
+to see if the feature you're requesting is already listed. (Be sure to search
+closed issues as well, since some feature requests have been rejected.) If the
+feature you'd like to see has already been requested and is open, click "add a
+reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up (+1). This
+ensures that the issue has a better chance of receiving attention. Also feel
+free to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
+(However, note that comments with no substance other than a "+1" will be
+deleted. Please use GitHub's reactions feature to indicate your support.)
 
-* For more information on how bug reports are handled, please see our [issue
-intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
+* Due to an excessive backlog of feature requests, we are not currently
+accepting any proposals which substantially extend NetBox's functionality
+beyond its current feature set. This includes the introduction of any new views
+or models which have not already been proposed in an existing feature request.
 
-## :bulb: Feature Requests
+* Before filing a new feature request, consider raising your idea on the
+mailing list first. Feedback you receive there will help validate and shape the
+proposed feature before filing a formal issue.
 
-* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues?q=is%3Aissue) to see if the feature you have in mind has already been proposed. If you happen to find an open feature request that matches your idea, click "add a reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up ( :thumbsup: ). This ensures that the issue has a better chance of receiving attention. Also feel free to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
+* Good feature requests are very narrowly defined. Be sure to thoroughly
+describe the functionality and data model(s) being proposed. The more effort
+you put into writing a feature request, the better its chance is of being
+implemented. Overly broad feature requests will be closed.
 
-* Please don't submit duplicate issues! Sometimes we reject feature requests, for various reasons. Even if you disagree with those reasons, please **do not** submit a duplicate feature request. It is very disrepectful of the maintainers' time, and you may be barred from opening future issues.
+* When submitting a feature request on GitHub, be sure to include the
+following:
 
-* If you have a rough idea that's not quite ready for formal submission yet, start a [GitHub discussion](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) instead. This is a great way to test the viability and narrow down the scope of a new feature prior to submitting a formal proposal, and can serve to generate interest in your idea from other community members.
+    * A detailed description of the proposed functionality
+    * A use case for the feature; who would use it and what value it would add
+      to NetBox
+    * A rough description of changes necessary to the database schema (if
+      applicable)
+    * Any third-party libraries or other resources which would be involved
 
-* Once you're ready, submit a feature request [using this template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?label=type%3A+feature&template=feature_request.yaml). Be sure to provide sufficient context and detail to convey exactly what you're proposing and why. The stronger your use case, the better chance your proposal has of being accepted.
+* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Feature]") to the issue
+title. The issue will be reviewed by a moderator after submission and the
+appropriate labels will be applied for categorization.
 
-* Some other tips to keep in mind:
-  * Don't prepend your issue title with a label like `[Feature]`; the proper label will be assigned automatically.
-  * Try to anticipate any likely questions about your proposal and provide that information proactively.
-  * Verify that you have GitHub notifications enabled and are subscribed to your issue after submitting.
-  * You're welcome to volunteer to implement your FR, but don't submit a pull request until it has been approved.
+## Submitting Pull Requests
 
-* For more information on how feature requests are handled, please see our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
+* Be sure to open an issue before starting work on a pull request, and discuss
+your idea with the NetBox maintainers before beginning work​. This will help
+prevent wasting time on something that might we might not be able to implement.
+When suggesting a new feature, also make sure it won't conflict with any work
+that's already in progress.
 
-## :arrow_heading_up: Submitting Pull Requests
+* When submitting a pull request, please be sure to work off of the `develop`
+branch, rather than `master`. The `develop` branch is used for ongoing
+development, while `master` is used for tagging new stable releases.
 
-* [Pull requests](https://docs.github.com/en/pull-requests) (a feature of GitHub) are used to propose changes to NetBox's code base. Our process generally goes like this:
-  * A user opens a new issue (bug report or feature request)
-  * A maintainer triages the issue and may mark it as needing an owner
-  * The issue's author can volunteer to own it, or someone else can
-  * A maintainer assigns the issue to whomever volunteers
-  * The issue owner submits a pull request that will resolve the issue
-  * A maintainer reviews and merges the pull request, closing the issue
+* All code submissions should meet the following criteria (CI will enforce
+these checks):
 
-* It's very important that you not submit a pull request until a relevant issue has been opened **and** assigned to you. Otherwise, you risk wasting time on work that may ultimately not be needed.
-
-* New pull requests should generally be based off of the `main` branch. This branch, in keeping with the [trunk-based development](https://trunkbaseddevelopment.com/) approach, is used for ongoing development and bug fixes and always represents the newest stable code, from which releases are periodically branched. (If you're developing for an upcoming minor release, use `feature` instead.)
-
-* In most cases, it is not necessary to add a changelog entry: A maintainer will take care of this when the PR is merged. (This helps avoid merge conflicts resulting from multiple PRs being submitted simultaneously.)
-
-* All code submissions must meet the following criteria (CI will enforce these checks where feasible):
-  * Consist entirely of original work
-  * Python syntax is valid
-  * All tests pass when run with `./manage.py test`
-  * PEP 8 compliance is enforced, with the exception that lines may be
+    * Python syntax is valid
+    * All tests pass when run with `./manage.py test`
+    * PEP 8 compliance is enforced, with the exception that lines may be
       greater than 80 characters in length
 
-> [!CAUTION]
-> Any contributions which include AI-generated or reproduced content will be rejected.
+## Commenting
 
-* Some other tips to keep in mind:
-  * If you'd like to volunteer for someone else's issue, please post a comment on that issue letting us know. (This will allow the maintainers to assign it to you.)
-  * Check out our [developer docs](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/development/getting-started/) for tips on setting up your development environment.
-  * All new functionality must include relevant tests where applicable.
-
-## :jigsaw: Creating Plugins
-
-Do you have an idea for something you'd like to build in NetBox, but might not be right for the core project? NetBox includes a powerful and extensive [plugins framework](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/plugins/) that enables users to develop their own custom data models and integrations.
-
-Check out our [plugin development tutorial](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-plugin-tutorial) to get started!
-
-## :briefcase: Looking for a Job?
-
-At [NetBox Labs](https://netboxlabs.com/), we're always looking for highly skilled and motivated people to join our team. While NetBox is a core part of our product lineup, we have an ever-expanding suite of solutions serving the network automation space. Check out our [current openings](https://netboxlabs.com/careers/) to see if you might be a fit!
-
-## :heart: Other Ways to Contribute
-
-You don't have to be a developer to contribute to NetBox: There are plenty of other ways you can add value to the community! Below are just a few examples:
-
-* Help answer questions and provide feedback in our [GitHub discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) and on [Slack](https://netdev.chat/).
-* Write a blog article or record a YouTube video demonstrating how NetBox is used at your organization.
-* Help grow our [library of device & module type definitions](https://github.com/netbox-community/devicetype-library).
+Only comment on an issue if you are sharing a relevant idea or constructive
+feedback. **Do not** comment on an issue just to show your support (give the
+top post a :+1: instead) or ask for an ETA. These comments will be deleted to
+reduce noise in the discussion.

NOTICE

@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-Copyrighted and licensed under Apache License 2.0 by DigitalOcean, LLC.
-
-This project contains code developed expressly for NetBox, and its reuse in
-other projects may introduce issues affecting performance, data integrity,
-and security.
-
-For more information, please see https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.

README.md

@@ -1,116 +1,43 @@
-<div align="center">
-  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/netbox-community/netbox/main/docs/netbox_logo_light.svg" width="400" alt="NetBox logo" />
-  <p><strong>The cornerstone of every automated network</strong></p>
-  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/v/release/netbox-community/netbox" alt="Latest release" /></a>
-  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/LICENSE.txt"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/license-Apache_2.0-blue.svg" alt="License" /></a>
-  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/graphs/contributors"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/contributors/netbox-community/netbox?color=blue" alt="Contributors" /></a>
-  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/stargazers"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/netbox-community/netbox?style=flat" alt="GitHub stars" /></a>
-  <a href="https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/languages-16-blue" alt="Languages supported" /></a>
-  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/actions/workflows/ci.yml"><img src="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/actions/workflows/ci.yml/badge.svg" alt="CI status" /></a>
-  <p>
-    <strong><a href="https://netboxlabs.com/community/">NetBox Community</a></strong> |
-    <strong><a href="https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-cloud/">NetBox Cloud</a></strong> |
-    <strong><a href="https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-enterprise/">NetBox Enterprise</a></strong>
-  </p>
-</div>
+![NetBox](docs/netbox_logo.png "NetBox logo")
 
-NetBox exists to empower network engineers. Since its release in 2016, it has become the go-to solution for modeling and documenting network infrastructure for thousands of organizations worldwide. As a successor to legacy IPAM and DCIM applications, NetBox provides a cohesive, extensive, and accessible data model for all things networked. By providing a single robust user interface and programmable APIs for everything from cable maps to device configurations, NetBox serves as the central source of truth for the modern network.
+NetBox is an IP address management (IPAM) and data center infrastructure
+management (DCIM) tool. Initially conceived by the network engineering team at
+[DigitalOcean](https://www.digitalocean.com/), NetBox was developed specifically
+to address the needs of network and infrastructure engineers.
 
-<p align="center">
-  <a href="#netboxs-role">NetBox's Role</a> |
-  <a href="#why-netbox">Why NetBox?</a> |
-  <a href="#getting-started">Getting Started</a> |
-  <a href="#get-involved">Get Involved</a> |
-  <a href="#screenshots">Screenshots</a>
-</p>
+NetBox runs as a web application atop the [Django](https://www.djangoproject.com/)
+Python framework with a [PostgreSQL](http://www.postgresql.org/) database. For a
+complete list of requirements, see `requirements.txt`. The code is available [on GitHub](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox).
 
-<p align="center">
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-light.png" width="600" alt="NetBox user interface screenshot" />
-</p>
+The complete documentation for NetBox can be found at [Read the Docs](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/).
 
-## NetBox's Role
+Questions? Comments? Please subscribe to [the netbox-discuss mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss),
+or join us in the #netbox Slack channel on [NetworkToCode](https://slack.networktocode.com/)!
 
-NetBox functions as the **source of truth** for your network infrastructure. Its job is to define and validate the _intended state_ of all network components and resources. NetBox does not interact with network nodes directly; rather, it makes this data available programmatically to purpose-built automation, monitoring, and assurance tools. This separation of duties enables the construction of a robust yet flexible automation system.
+### Build Status
 
-<p align="center">
-  <img src="docs/media/misc/reference_architecture.png" alt="Reference network automation architecture" />
-</p>
+NetBox is built against both Python 2.7 and 3.5.  Python 3.5 is recommended.
 
-The diagram above illustrates the recommended deployment architecture for an automated network, leveraging NetBox as the central authority for network state. This approach allows your team to swap out individual tools to meet changing needs while retaining a predictable, modular workflow.
-
-## Why NetBox?
-
-### Comprehensive Data Model
-
-Racks, devices, cables, IP addresses, VLANs, circuits, power, VPNs, and lots more: NetBox is built for networks. Its comprehensive and thoroughly inter-linked data model provides for natural and highly structured modeling of myriad network primitives that just isn't possible using general-purpose tools. And there's no need to waste time contemplating how to build out a database: Everything is ready to go upon installation.
-
-### Focused Development
-
-NetBox strives to meet a singular goal: Provide the best available solution for making network infrastructure programmatically accessible. Unlike "all-in-one" tools which awkwardly bolt on half-baked features in an attempt to check every box, NetBox is committed to its core function. NetBox provides the best possible solution for modeling network infrastructure, and provides rich APIs for integrating with tools that excel in other areas of network automation.
-
-### Extensible and Customizable
-
-No two networks are exactly the same. Users are empowered to extend NetBox's native data model with custom fields and tags to best suit their unique needs. You can even write your own plugins to introduce entirely new objects and functionality!
-
-### Flexible Permissions
-
-NetBox includes a fully customizable permission system, which affords administrators incredible granularity when assigning roles to users and groups. Want to restrict certain users to working only with cabling and not be able to change IP addresses? Or maybe each team should have access only to a particular tenant? NetBox enables you to craft roles as you see fit.
-
-### Custom Validation & Protection Rules
-
-The data you put into NetBox is crucial to network operations. In addition to its robust native validation rules, NetBox provides mechanisms for administrators to define their own custom validation rules for objects. Custom validation can be used both to ensure new or modified objects adhere to a set of rules, and to prevent the deletion of objects which don't meet certain criteria. (For example, you might want to prevent the deletion of a device with an "active" status.)
-
-### Device Configuration Rendering
-
-NetBox can render user-created Jinja2 templates to generate device configurations from its own data. Configuration templates can be uploaded individually or pulled automatically from an external source, such as a git repository. Rendered configurations can be retrieved via the REST API for application directly to network devices via a provisioning tool such as Ansible or Salt.
-
-### Custom Scripts
-
-Complex workflows, such as provisioning a new branch office, can be tedious to carry out via the user interface. NetBox allows you to write and upload custom scripts that can be run directly from the UI. Scripts prompt users for input and then automate the necessary tasks to greatly simplify otherwise burdensome processes.
-
-### Automated Events
-
-Users can define event rules to automatically trigger a custom script or outbound webhook in response to a NetBox event. For example, you might want to automatically update a network monitoring service whenever a new device is added to NetBox, or update a DHCP server when an IP range is allocated.
-
-### Comprehensive Change Logging
-
-NetBox automatically logs the creation, modification, and deletion of all managed objects, providing a thorough change history. Changes can be attributed to the executing user, and related changes are grouped automatically by request ID.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> A complete list of NetBox's myriad features can be found in [the introductory documentation](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/introduction/).
-
-## Getting Started
-
-* Just want to explore? Check out [our public demo](https://demo.netbox.dev/) right now!
-* The [official documentation](https://docs.netbox.dev) offers a comprehensive introduction.
-* Check out [our wiki](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Community-Contributions) for even more projects to get the most out of NetBox!
-
-## Get Involved
-
-* Follow [@NetBoxOfficial](https://twitter.com/NetBoxOfficial) on Twitter!
-* Join the conversation on [the discussion forum](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) and [Slack](https://netdev.chat/)!
-* Already a power user? You can [suggest a feature](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+feature&template=feature_request.yaml) or [report a bug](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+bug&template=bug_report.yaml) on GitHub.
-* Contributions from the community are encouraged and appreciated! Check out our [contributing guide](CONTRIBUTING.md) to get started.
+|             | status |
+|-------------|------------|
+| **master** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox) |
+| **develop** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox.svg?branch=develop)](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox) |
 
 ## Screenshots
 
-<p align="center">
-  <strong>NetBox Dashboard (Light Mode)</strong><br />
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-light.png" width="600" alt="NetBox dashboard (light mode)" />
-</p>
-<p align="center">
-  <strong>NetBox Dashboard (Dark Mode)</strong><br />
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-dark.png" width="600" alt="NetBox dashboard (dark mode)" />
-</p>
-<p align="center">
-  <strong>Prefixes List</strong><br />
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/prefixes-list.png" width="600" alt="Prefixes list" />
-</p>
-<p align="center">
-  <strong>Rack View</strong><br />
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/rack.png" width="600" alt="Rack view" />
-</p>
-<p align="center">
-  <strong>Cable Trace</strong><br />
-  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/cable-trace.png" width="600" alt="Cable trace" />
-</p>
+![Screenshot of main page](docs/media/screenshot1.png "Main page")
+
+![Screenshot of rack elevation](docs/media/screenshot2.png "Rack elevation")
+
+![Screenshot of prefix hierarchy](docs/media/screenshot3.png "Prefix hierarchy")
+
+# Installation
+
+Please see [the documentation](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for
+instructions on installing NetBox. To upgrade NetBox, please download the [latest release](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases)
+and run `upgrade.sh`.
+
+## Alternative Installations
+
+* [Docker container](https://github.com/ninech/netbox-docker) (via [@cimnine](https://github.com/cimnine))
+* [Vagrant deployment](https://github.com/ryanmerolle/netbox-vagrant) (via [@ryanmerolle](https://github.com/ryanmerolle))

SECURITY.md

@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-# Security Policy
-
-## No Warranty
-
-Per the terms of the Apache 2 license, NetBox is offered "as is" and without any guarantee or warranty pertaining to its operation. While every reasonable effort is made by its maintainers to ensure the product remains free of security vulnerabilities, users are ultimately responsible for conducting their own evaluations of each software release.
-
-## Recommendations
-
-Administrators are encouraged to adhere to industry best practices concerning the secure operation of software, such as:
-
-* Do not expose your NetBox installation to the public Internet
-* Do not permit multiple users to share an account
-* Enforce minimum password complexity requirements for local accounts
-* Prohibit access to your database from clients other than the NetBox application
-* Keep your deployment updated to the most recent stable release
-
-## Compliance Reporting
-
-Please note that security compliance reports (e.g. SOC 2) are provided by NetBox Labs only to customers using NetBox Cloud or NetBox Enterprise. They are not available to users of self-hosted NetBox Community Edition.
-
-If you would like to consider upgrading to NetBox Cloud or Enterprise, please contact `sales@netboxlabs.com`.
-
-## Reporting a Suspected Vulnerability
-
-If you believe you've uncovered a security vulnerability and wish to report it confidentially, you may do so by emailing `security@netboxlabs.com`. Please ensure that your report meets all the following conditions:
-
-* Affects the most recent stable release of NetBox, or a current beta release
-* Affects a NetBox instance installed and configured per the official documentation
-* Is reproducible following a prescribed set of instructions
-
-Please note that we **DO NOT** accept reports generated by automated tooling which merely suggest that a file or file(s) _may_ be vulnerable under certain conditions, as these are most often innocuous.
-
-For any security concerns regarding the community-maintained Docker image for NetBox, please see the [netbox-docker](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker) project.
-
-### Bug Bounties
-
-As NetBox is provided as free open source software, we do not offer any monetary compensation for vulnerability or bug reports; however, your contributions are greatly appreciated.

base_requirements.txt

@@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
-# Shell text coloring
-# https://github.com/tartley/colorama/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-colorama
-
-# The Python web framework on which NetBox is built
-# https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/releases/
-Django==5.2.*
-
-# Django middleware which permits cross-domain API requests
-# https://github.com/adamchainz/django-cors-headers/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
-django-cors-headers
-
-# Runtime UI tool for debugging Django
-# https://github.com/jazzband/django-debug-toolbar/blob/main/docs/changes.rst
-django-debug-toolbar
-
-# Library for writing reusable URL query filters
-# https://github.com/carltongibson/django-filter/blob/main/CHANGES.rst
-django-filter
-
-# Django Debug Toolbar extension for GraphiQL
-# https://github.com/flavors/django-graphiql-debug-toolbar/blob/main/CHANGES.rst
-django-graphiql-debug-toolbar
-
-# HTMX utilities for Django
-# https://django-htmx.readthedocs.io/en/latest/changelog.html
-django-htmx
-
-# Modified Preorder Tree Traversal (recursive nesting of objects)
-# https://github.com/django-mptt/django-mptt/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
-# v0.18.0 introduces errant migrations which need to be resolved
-django-mptt==0.17.0
-
-# Context managers for PostgreSQL advisory locks
-# https://github.com/Xof/django-pglocks/blob/master/CHANGES.txt
-django-pglocks
-
-# Prometheus metrics library for Django
-# https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
-django-prometheus
-
-# Django caching backend using Redis
-# https://github.com/jazzband/django-redis/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-django-redis
-
-# Django extensions for Rich (terminal text rendering)
-# https://github.com/adamchainz/django-rich/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
-django-rich
-
-# Django integration for RQ (Reqis queuing)
-# https://github.com/rq/django-rq/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
-django-rq
-
-# Provides a variety of storage backends
-# https://github.com/jschneier/django-storages/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-django-storages
-
-# Abstraction models for rendering and paginating HTML tables
-# https://github.com/jieter/django-tables2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
-django-tables2
-
-# User-defined tags for objects
-# https://github.com/jazzband/django-taggit/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-django-taggit
-
-# A Django field for representing time zones
-# https://github.com/mfogel/django-timezone-field/
-django-timezone-field
-
-# A REST API framework for Django projects
-# https://www.django-rest-framework.org/community/release-notes/
-# TODO: Re-evaluate the monkey-patch of get_unique_validators() before upgrading
-djangorestframework==3.16.1
-
-# Sane and flexible OpenAPI 3 schema generation for Django REST framework.
-# https://github.com/tfranzel/drf-spectacular/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-drf-spectacular
-
-# Serve self-contained distribution builds of Swagger UI and Redoc with Django.
-# https://github.com/tfranzel/drf-spectacular-sidecar
-drf-spectacular-sidecar
-
-# RSS feed parser
-# https://github.com/kurtmckee/feedparser/blob/develop/CHANGELOG.rst
-feedparser
-
-# WSGI HTTP server
-# https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/latest/news.html
-gunicorn
-
-# Platform-agnostic template rendering engine
-# https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/changes/
-Jinja2
-
-# JSON schema validation
-# https://github.com/python-jsonschema/jsonschema/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
-jsonschema
-
-# Simple markup language for rendering HTML
-# https://python-markdown.github.io/changelog/
-Markdown
-
-# MkDocs Material theme (for documentation build)
-# https://squidfunk.github.io/mkdocs-material/changelog/
-mkdocs-material
-
-# Introspection for embedded code
-# https://github.com/mkdocstrings/mkdocstrings/blob/main/CHANGELOG.md
-mkdocstrings
-
-# Python handler for mkdocstrings
-# https://github.com/mkdocstrings/python/blob/main/CHANGELOG.md
-mkdocstrings-python
-
-# Library for manipulating IP prefixes and addresses
-# https://github.com/netaddr/netaddr/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
-netaddr
-
-# Python bindings to the ammonia HTML sanitization library.
-# https://github.com/messense/nh3
-nh3
-
-# Fork of PIL (Python Imaging Library) for image processing
-# https://github.com/python-pillow/Pillow/releases
-# https://pillow.readthedocs.io/en/stable/releasenotes/
-Pillow
-
-# PostgreSQL database adapter for Python
-# https://github.com/psycopg/psycopg/blob/master/docs/news.rst
-psycopg[c,pool]
-
-# YAML rendering library
-# https://github.com/yaml/pyyaml/blob/master/CHANGES
-PyYAML
-
-# Requests
-# https://github.com/psf/requests/blob/main/HISTORY.md
-requests
-
-# rq
-# https://github.com/rq/rq/blob/master/CHANGES.md
-rq
-
-# Django app for social-auth-core
-# https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-app-django/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
-social-auth-app-django
-
-# Social authentication framework
-# https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-core/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
-social-auth-core
-
-# Image thumbnail generation
-# https://github.com/jazzband/sorl-thumbnail/blob/master/CHANGES.rst
-sorl-thumbnail
-
-# Strawberry GraphQL
-# https://github.com/strawberry-graphql/strawberry/blob/main/CHANGELOG.md
-strawberry-graphql
-
-# Strawberry GraphQL Django extension
-# https://github.com/strawberry-graphql/strawberry-django/releases
-strawberry-graphql-django
-
-# SVG image rendering (used for rack elevations)
-# https://github.com/mozman/svgwrite/blob/master/NEWS.rst
-svgwrite
-
-# Tabular dataset library (for table-based exports)
-# Current: https://github.com/jazzband/tablib/releases
-# Previous: https://github.com/jazzband/tablib/blob/master/HISTORY.md
-tablib
-
-# Timezone data (required by django-timezone-field on Python 3.9+)
-# https://github.com/python/tzdata/blob/master/NEWS.md
-tzdata

contrib/apache.conf

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<VirtualHost *:80>
-    # CHANGE THIS TO YOUR SERVER'S NAME
-    ServerName netbox.example.com
-
-    RewriteEngine On
-    RewriteCond %{HTTPS} !=on
-    RewriteRule ^/?(.*) https://%{SERVER_NAME}/$1 [R,L]
-</VirtualHost>
-
-<VirtualHost *:443>
-    ProxyPreserveHost On
-
-    # CHANGE THIS TO YOUR SERVER'S NAME
-    ServerName netbox.example.com
-
-    SSLEngine on
-    SSLCertificateFile /etc/ssl/certs/netbox.crt
-    SSLCertificateKeyFile /etc/ssl/private/netbox.key
-
-    Alias /static /opt/netbox/netbox/static
-
-    <Directory /opt/netbox/netbox/static>
-        Options FollowSymLinks MultiViews
-        AllowOverride None
-        Require all granted
-    </Directory>
-
-    <Location /static>
-        ProxyPass !
-    </Location>
-
-    RequestHeader set "X-Forwarded-Proto" expr=%{REQUEST_SCHEME}
-    ProxyPass / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
-    ProxyPassReverse / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
-</VirtualHost>

contrib/generated_schema.json

@@ -1,702 +0,0 @@
-{
-    "type": "object",
-    "$id": "urn:devicetype-library:generated-schema",
-    "$schema": "https://json-schema.org/draft/2020-12/schema",
-    "additionalProperties": false,
-    "definitions": {
-        "airflow": {
-            "type": "string",
-            "enum": [
-                "front-to-rear",
-                "rear-to-front",
-                "left-to-right",
-                "right-to-left",
-                "side-to-rear",
-                "rear-to-side",
-                "bottom-to-top",
-                "top-to-bottom",
-                "passive",
-                "mixed"
-            ]
-        },
-        "weight-unit": {
-            "type": "string",
-            "enum": [
-                "kg",
-                "g",
-                "lb",
-                "oz"
-            ]
-        },
-        "subdevice-role": {
-            "type": "string",
-            "enum": [
-                "parent",
-                "child"
-            ]
-        },
-        "console-port": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "de-9",
-                        "db-25",
-                        "rj-11",
-                        "rj-12",
-                        "rj-45",
-                        "mini-din-8",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "usb-mini-a",
-                        "usb-mini-b",
-                        "usb-micro-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-micro-ab",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "console-server-port": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "de-9",
-                        "db-25",
-                        "rj-11",
-                        "rj-12",
-                        "rj-45",
-                        "mini-din-8",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "usb-mini-a",
-                        "usb-mini-b",
-                        "usb-micro-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-micro-ab",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "power-port": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "iec-60320-c6",
-                        "iec-60320-c8",
-                        "iec-60320-c14",
-                        "iec-60320-c16",
-                        "iec-60320-c18",
-                        "iec-60320-c20",
-                        "iec-60320-c22",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60906-1",
-                        "nbr-14136-10a",
-                        "nbr-14136-20a",
-                        "nema-1-15p",
-                        "nema-5-15p",
-                        "nema-5-20p",
-                        "nema-5-30p",
-                        "nema-5-50p",
-                        "nema-6-15p",
-                        "nema-6-20p",
-                        "nema-6-30p",
-                        "nema-6-50p",
-                        "nema-10-30p",
-                        "nema-10-50p",
-                        "nema-14-20p",
-                        "nema-14-30p",
-                        "nema-14-50p",
-                        "nema-14-60p",
-                        "nema-15-15p",
-                        "nema-15-20p",
-                        "nema-15-30p",
-                        "nema-15-50p",
-                        "nema-15-60p",
-                        "nema-l1-15p",
-                        "nema-l5-15p",
-                        "nema-l5-20p",
-                        "nema-l5-30p",
-                        "nema-l5-50p",
-                        "nema-l6-15p",
-                        "nema-l6-20p",
-                        "nema-l6-30p",
-                        "nema-l6-50p",
-                        "nema-l10-30p",
-                        "nema-l14-20p",
-                        "nema-l14-30p",
-                        "nema-l14-50p",
-                        "nema-l14-60p",
-                        "nema-l15-20p",
-                        "nema-l15-30p",
-                        "nema-l15-50p",
-                        "nema-l15-60p",
-                        "nema-l21-20p",
-                        "nema-l21-30p",
-                        "nema-l22-20p",
-                        "nema-l22-30p",
-                        "cs6361c",
-                        "cs6365c",
-                        "cs8165c",
-                        "cs8265c",
-                        "cs8365c",
-                        "cs8465c",
-                        "ita-c",
-                        "ita-e",
-                        "ita-f",
-                        "ita-ef",
-                        "ita-g",
-                        "ita-h",
-                        "ita-i",
-                        "ita-j",
-                        "ita-k",
-                        "ita-l",
-                        "ita-m",
-                        "ita-n",
-                        "ita-o",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "usb-mini-a",
-                        "usb-mini-b",
-                        "usb-micro-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-micro-ab",
-                        "usb-3-b",
-                        "usb-3-micro-b",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-1x2",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x2",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x3",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x4",
-                        "dc-terminal",
-                        "saf-d-grid",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-20",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-32",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-true1",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-true1-top",
-                        "ubiquiti-smartpower",
-                        "hardwired",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "power-outlet": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "iec-60320-c5",
-                        "iec-60320-c7",
-                        "iec-60320-c13",
-                        "iec-60320-c15",
-                        "iec-60320-c17",
-                        "iec-60320-c19",
-                        "iec-60320-c21",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-2p-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-4h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-6h",
-                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-9h",
-                        "iec-60906-1",
-                        "nbr-14136-10a",
-                        "nbr-14136-20a",
-                        "nema-1-15r",
-                        "nema-5-15r",
-                        "nema-5-20r",
-                        "nema-5-30r",
-                        "nema-5-50r",
-                        "nema-6-15r",
-                        "nema-6-20r",
-                        "nema-6-30r",
-                        "nema-6-50r",
-                        "nema-10-30r",
-                        "nema-10-50r",
-                        "nema-14-20r",
-                        "nema-14-30r",
-                        "nema-14-50r",
-                        "nema-14-60r",
-                        "nema-15-15r",
-                        "nema-15-20r",
-                        "nema-15-30r",
-                        "nema-15-50r",
-                        "nema-15-60r",
-                        "nema-l1-15r",
-                        "nema-l5-15r",
-                        "nema-l5-20r",
-                        "nema-l5-30r",
-                        "nema-l5-50r",
-                        "nema-l6-15r",
-                        "nema-l6-20r",
-                        "nema-l6-30r",
-                        "nema-l6-50r",
-                        "nema-l10-30r",
-                        "nema-l14-20r",
-                        "nema-l14-30r",
-                        "nema-l14-50r",
-                        "nema-l14-60r",
-                        "nema-l15-20r",
-                        "nema-l15-30r",
-                        "nema-l15-50r",
-                        "nema-l15-60r",
-                        "nema-l21-20r",
-                        "nema-l21-30r",
-                        "nema-l22-20r",
-                        "nema-l22-30r",
-                        "CS6360C",
-                        "CS6364C",
-                        "CS8164C",
-                        "CS8264C",
-                        "CS8364C",
-                        "CS8464C",
-                        "ita-e",
-                        "ita-f",
-                        "ita-g",
-                        "ita-h",
-                        "ita-i",
-                        "ita-j",
-                        "ita-k",
-                        "ita-l",
-                        "ita-m",
-                        "ita-n",
-                        "ita-o",
-                        "ita-multistandard",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-1x2",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x2",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x3",
-                        "molex-micro-fit-2x4",
-                        "dc-terminal",
-                        "eaton-c39",
-                        "hdot-cx",
-                        "saf-d-grid",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-20a",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-32a",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-true1",
-                        "neutrik-powercon-true1-top",
-                        "ubiquiti-smartpower",
-                        "hardwired",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                },
-                "feed-leg": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "A",
-                        "B",
-                        "C"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "interface": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "virtual",
-                        "bridge",
-                        "lag",
-                        "100base-fx",
-                        "100base-lfx",
-                        "100base-tx",
-                        "100base-t1",
-                        "1000base-bx10-d",
-                        "1000base-bx10-u",
-                        "1000base-cwdm",
-                        "1000base-cx",
-                        "1000base-dwdm",
-                        "1000base-ex",
-                        "1000base-lsx",
-                        "1000base-lx",
-                        "1000base-lx10",
-                        "1000base-sx",
-                        "1000base-t",
-                        "1000base-tx",
-                        "1000base-zx",
-                        "2.5gbase-t",
-                        "5gbase-t",
-                        "10gbase-br-d",
-                        "10gbase-br-u",
-                        "10gbase-cx4",
-                        "10gbase-er",
-                        "10gbase-lr",
-                        "10gbase-lrm",
-                        "10gbase-lx4",
-                        "10gbase-sr",
-                        "10gbase-t",
-                        "10gbase-zr",
-                        "25gbase-cr",
-                        "25gbase-er",
-                        "25gbase-lr",
-                        "25gbase-sr",
-                        "25gbase-t",
-                        "40gbase-cr4",
-                        "40gbase-er4",
-                        "40gbase-fr4",
-                        "40gbase-lr4",
-                        "40gbase-sr4",
-                        "50gbase-cr",
-                        "50gbase-er",
-                        "50gbase-fr",
-                        "50gbase-lr",
-                        "50gbase-sr",
-                        "100gbase-cr1",
-                        "100gbase-cr2",
-                        "100gbase-cr4",
-                        "100gbase-cr10",
-                        "100gbase-cwdm4",
-                        "100gbase-dr",
-                        "100gbase-er4",
-                        "100gbase-fr1",
-                        "100gbase-lr1",
-                        "100gbase-lr4",
-                        "100gbase-sr1",
-                        "100gbase-sr1.2",
-                        "100gbase-sr2",
-                        "100gbase-sr4",
-                        "100gbase-sr10",
-                        "100gbase-zr",
-                        "200gbase-cr2",
-                        "200gbase-cr4",
-                        "200gbase-dr4",
-                        "200gbase-er4",
-                        "200gbase-fr4",
-                        "200gbase-lr4",
-                        "200gbase-sr2",
-                        "200gbase-sr4",
-                        "200gbase-vr2",
-                        "400gbase-cr4",
-                        "400gbase-dr4",
-                        "400gbase-er8",
-                        "400gbase-fr4",
-                        "400gbase-fr8",
-                        "400gbase-lr4",
-                        "400gbase-lr8",
-                        "400gbase-sr4",
-                        "400gbase-sr4_2",
-                        "400gbase-sr8",
-                        "400gbase-sr16",
-                        "400gbase-vr4",
-                        "400gbase-zr",
-                        "800gbase-cr8",
-                        "800gbase-dr8",
-                        "800gbase-sr8",
-                        "800gbase-vr8",
-                        "100base-x-sfp",
-                        "1000base-x-gbic",
-                        "1000base-x-sfp",
-                        "10gbase-x-sfpp",
-                        "10gbase-x-xenpak",
-                        "10gbase-x-xfp",
-                        "10gbase-x-x2",
-                        "25gbase-x-sfp28",
-                        "40gbase-x-qsfpp",
-                        "50gbase-x-sfp28",
-                        "50gbase-x-sfp56",
-                        "100gbase-x-cfp",
-                        "100gbase-x-cfp2",
-                        "100gbase-x-cfp4",
-                        "100gbase-x-cxp",
-                        "100gbase-x-cpak",
-                        "100gbase-x-dsfp",
-                        "100gbase-x-qsfp28",
-                        "100gbase-x-qsfpdd",
-                        "100gbase-x-sfpdd",
-                        "200gbase-x-cfp2",
-                        "200gbase-x-qsfp56",
-                        "200gbase-x-qsfpdd",
-                        "400gbase-x-qsfp112",
-                        "400gbase-x-qsfpdd",
-                        "400gbase-x-cdfp",
-                        "400gbase-x-cfp2",
-                        "400gbase-x-cfp8",
-                        "400gbase-x-osfp",
-                        "400gbase-x-osfp-rhs",
-                        "800gbase-x-osfp",
-                        "800gbase-x-qsfpdd",
-                        "1000base-kx",
-                        "2.5gbase-kx",
-                        "5gbase-kr",
-                        "10gbase-kr",
-                        "10gbase-kx4",
-                        "25gbase-kr",
-                        "40gbase-kr4",
-                        "50gbase-kr",
-                        "100gbase-kp4",
-                        "100gbase-kr2",
-                        "100gbase-kr4",
-                        "ieee802.11a",
-                        "ieee802.11g",
-                        "ieee802.11n",
-                        "ieee802.11ac",
-                        "ieee802.11ad",
-                        "ieee802.11ax",
-                        "ieee802.11ay",
-                        "ieee802.11be",
-                        "ieee802.15.1",
-                        "ieee802.15.4",
-                        "other-wireless",
-                        "gsm",
-                        "cdma",
-                        "lte",
-                        "4g",
-                        "5g",
-                        "sonet-oc3",
-                        "sonet-oc12",
-                        "sonet-oc48",
-                        "sonet-oc192",
-                        "sonet-oc768",
-                        "sonet-oc1920",
-                        "sonet-oc3840",
-                        "1gfc-sfp",
-                        "2gfc-sfp",
-                        "4gfc-sfp",
-                        "8gfc-sfpp",
-                        "16gfc-sfpp",
-                        "32gfc-sfp28",
-                        "32gfc-sfpp",
-                        "64gfc-qsfpp",
-                        "64gfc-sfpdd",
-                        "64gfc-sfpp",
-                        "128gfc-qsfp28",
-                        "infiniband-sdr",
-                        "infiniband-ddr",
-                        "infiniband-qdr",
-                        "infiniband-fdr10",
-                        "infiniband-fdr",
-                        "infiniband-edr",
-                        "infiniband-hdr",
-                        "infiniband-ndr",
-                        "infiniband-xdr",
-                        "t1",
-                        "e1",
-                        "t3",
-                        "e3",
-                        "xdsl",
-                        "docsis",
-                        "moca",
-                        "bpon",
-                        "epon",
-                        "10g-epon",
-                        "gpon",
-                        "xg-pon",
-                        "xgs-pon",
-                        "ng-pon2",
-                        "25g-pon",
-                        "50g-pon",
-                        "cisco-stackwise",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-plus",
-                        "cisco-flexstack",
-                        "cisco-flexstack-plus",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-80",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-160",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-320",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-480",
-                        "cisco-stackwise-1t",
-                        "juniper-vcp",
-                        "extreme-summitstack",
-                        "extreme-summitstack-128",
-                        "extreme-summitstack-256",
-                        "extreme-summitstack-512",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                },
-                "poe_mode": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "pd",
-                        "pse"
-                    ]
-                },
-                "poe_type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "type1-ieee802.3af",
-                        "type2-ieee802.3at",
-                        "type3-ieee802.3bt",
-                        "type4-ieee802.3bt",
-                        "passive-24v-2pair",
-                        "passive-24v-4pair",
-                        "passive-48v-2pair",
-                        "passive-48v-4pair"
-                    ]
-                },
-                "rf_role": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "ap",
-                        "station"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "front-port": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "8p8c",
-                        "8p6c",
-                        "8p4c",
-                        "8p2c",
-                        "6p6c",
-                        "6p4c",
-                        "6p2c",
-                        "4p4c",
-                        "4p2c",
-                        "gg45",
-                        "tera-4p",
-                        "tera-2p",
-                        "tera-1p",
-                        "110-punch",
-                        "bnc",
-                        "f",
-                        "n",
-                        "mrj21",
-                        "fc",
-                        "fc-pc",
-                        "fc-upc",
-                        "fc-apc",
-                        "lc",
-                        "lc-pc",
-                        "lc-upc",
-                        "lc-apc",
-                        "lsh",
-                        "lsh-pc",
-                        "lsh-upc",
-                        "lsh-apc",
-                        "lx5",
-                        "lx5-pc",
-                        "lx5-upc",
-                        "lx5-apc",
-                        "mpo",
-                        "mtrj",
-                        "sc",
-                        "sc-pc",
-                        "sc-upc",
-                        "sc-apc",
-                        "st",
-                        "cs",
-                        "sn",
-                        "sma-905",
-                        "sma-906",
-                        "urm-p2",
-                        "urm-p4",
-                        "urm-p8",
-                        "splice",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "usb-mini-a",
-                        "usb-mini-b",
-                        "usb-micro-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-micro-ab",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        },
-        "rear-port": {
-            "type": "object",
-            "properties": {
-                "type": {
-                    "type": "string",
-                    "enum": [
-                        "8p8c",
-                        "8p6c",
-                        "8p4c",
-                        "8p2c",
-                        "6p6c",
-                        "6p4c",
-                        "6p2c",
-                        "4p4c",
-                        "4p2c",
-                        "gg45",
-                        "tera-4p",
-                        "tera-2p",
-                        "tera-1p",
-                        "110-punch",
-                        "bnc",
-                        "f",
-                        "n",
-                        "mrj21",
-                        "fc",
-                        "fc-pc",
-                        "fc-upc",
-                        "fc-apc",
-                        "lc",
-                        "lc-pc",
-                        "lc-upc",
-                        "lc-apc",
-                        "lsh",
-                        "lsh-pc",
-                        "lsh-upc",
-                        "lsh-apc",
-                        "lx5",
-                        "lx5-pc",
-                        "lx5-upc",
-                        "lx5-apc",
-                        "mpo",
-                        "mtrj",
-                        "sc",
-                        "sc-pc",
-                        "sc-upc",
-                        "sc-apc",
-                        "st",
-                        "cs",
-                        "sn",
-                        "sma-905",
-                        "sma-906",
-                        "urm-p2",
-                        "urm-p4",
-                        "urm-p8",
-                        "splice",
-                        "usb-a",
-                        "usb-b",
-                        "usb-c",
-                        "usb-mini-a",
-                        "usb-mini-b",
-                        "usb-micro-a",
-                        "usb-micro-b",
-                        "usb-micro-ab",
-                        "other"
-                    ]
-                }
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}

contrib/gunicorn.py

@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-# The IP address (typically localhost) and port that the NetBox WSGI process should listen on
-bind = '127.0.0.1:8001'
-
-# Number of gunicorn workers to spawn. This should typically be 2n+1, where
-# n is the number of CPU cores present.
-workers = 5
-
-# Number of threads per worker process
-threads = 3
-
-# Timeout (in seconds) for a request to complete
-timeout = 120
-
-# The maximum number of requests a worker can handle before being respawned
-max_requests = 5000
-max_requests_jitter = 500
-
-# Uncomment this line to accept HTTP headers containing underscores, e.g. for remote
-# authentication support. See https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map
-# header-map = 'dangerous'

contrib/netbox-rq.service

@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-[Unit]
-Description=NetBox Request Queue Worker
-Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
-After=network-online.target
-Wants=network-online.target
-
-[Service]
-Type=simple
-
-User=netbox
-Group=netbox
-WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
-
-ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/python3 /opt/netbox/netbox/manage.py rqworker high default low
-
-Restart=on-failure
-RestartSec=30
-PrivateTmp=true
-
-[Install]
-WantedBy=multi-user.target

contrib/netbox.service

@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-[Unit]
-Description=NetBox WSGI Service
-Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
-After=network-online.target
-Wants=network-online.target
-
-[Service]
-Type=simple
-
-User=netbox
-Group=netbox
-PIDFile=/var/tmp/netbox.pid
-WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
-
-# Remove the following line if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
-ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/netbox --config /opt/netbox/gunicorn.py netbox.wsgi
-
-# Uncomment the following line if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
-#ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/uwsgi --ini /opt/netbox/uwsgi.ini
-
-Restart=on-failure
-RestartSec=30
-PrivateTmp=true
-
-[Install]
-WantedBy=multi-user.target

contrib/nginx.conf

@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-server {
-    listen [::]:443 ssl ipv6only=off;
-
-    # CHANGE THIS TO YOUR SERVER'S NAME
-    server_name netbox.example.com;
-
-    ssl_certificate /etc/ssl/certs/netbox.crt;
-    ssl_certificate_key /etc/ssl/private/netbox.key;
-
-    client_max_body_size 25m;
-
-    location /static/ {
-        alias /opt/netbox/netbox/static/;
-    }
-
-    location / {
-        # Remove these lines if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
-        proxy_pass http://127.0.0.1:8001;
-        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Host $http_host;
-        proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
-        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme;
-
-        # Uncomment these lines if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
-        # include uwsgi_params;
-        # uwsgi_pass  127.0.0.1:8001;
-        # uwsgi_param Host $host;
-        # uwsgi_param X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
-        # uwsgi_param X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for;
-        # uwsgi_param X-Forwarded-Proto $http_x_forwarded_proto;
-
-    }
-}
-
-server {
-    # Redirect HTTP traffic to HTTPS
-    listen [::]:80 ipv6only=off;
-    server_name _;
-    return 301 https://$host$request_uri;
-}

contrib/uwsgi.ini

@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-[uwsgi]
-; bind to the specified UNIX/TCP socket and port (usually localhost)
-socket = 127.0.0.1:8001
-
-; fail to start if any parameter in the configuration file isn’t explicitly understood by uWSGI.
-strict = true
-
-; re-spawn and pre-fork workers
-master = true
-
-; clear environment on exit
-vacuum = true
-
-; make SIGTERM stop the app (instead of reload)
-die-on-term = true
-
-; exit if no app can be loaded
-need-app = true
-
-; do not use multiple interpreters
-single-interpreter = true
-
-; change to the project directory
-chdir = netbox
-
-; specify the WSGI module to load
-module = netbox.wsgi
-
-; workaround to make uWSGI reloads work with pyuwsgi (not to be used if using uwsgi package instead)
-binary-path = venv/bin/python
-
-; only log internal messages and errors (reverse proxy already logs the requests)
-disable-logging = true
-log-5xx = true

docs/_theme/main.html

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-{% extends "base.html" %}
-
-{% block site_meta %}
-  {{ super() }}
-  {# Disable search indexing unless we're building for public consumption #}
-  {% if not config.extra.build_public %}
-    <meta name="robots" content="noindex">
-  {% endif %}
-{% endblock %}

docs/_theme/partials/copyright.html

@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-<div class="md-copyright">
-  {% if config.copyright %}
-    <div class="md-copyright__highlight">
-      {{ config.copyright }}
-    </div>
-  {% endif %}
-  {% if not config.extra.generator == false %}
-    Made with
-    <a href="https://squidfunk.github.io/mkdocs-material/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">
-      Material for MkDocs
-    </a>
-  {% endif %}
-</div>
-{% if not config.extra.build_public %}
-  <div class="md-copyright">
-    ℹ️ Documentation is being served locally
-  </div>
-{% endif %}

docs/administration/authentication/google.md

@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-# Google
-
-This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Google OAuth2](https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/web-server) as an authentication backend.
-
-## Google OAuth2 Configuration
-
-1. Log into [console.cloud.google.com](https://console.cloud.google.com/).
-2. Create new project for NetBox.
-3. Under "APIs and Services" click "OAuth consent screen" and enter the required information.
-4. Under "Credentials," click "Create Credentials" and select "OAuth 2.0 Client ID." Select type "Web application."
-    - "Authorized JavaScript origins" should follow the format `http[s]://<netbox>[:<port>]`
-    - "Authorized redirect URIs" should follow the format `http[s]://<netbox>[:<port>]/oauth/complete/google-oauth2/`
-5. Copy the "Client ID" and "Client Secret" values somewhere convenient.
-
-!!! note
-    Google requires the NetBox hostname to use a public top-level-domain (e.g. `.com`, `.net`). The use of IP addresses is not permitted (except `127.0.0.1`).
-
-For more information, consult [Google's documentation](https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/web-server#prerequisites).
-
-## NetBox Configuration
-
-### 1. Enter configuration parameters
-
-Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.google.GoogleOAuth2'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_GOOGLE_OAUTH2_KEY = '{CLIENT_ID}'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_GOOGLE_OAUTH2_SECRET = '{CLIENT_SECRET}'
-```
-
-### 2. Restart NetBox
-
-Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo systemctl restart netbox
-```
-
-## Testing
-
-Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Google. Click that link.
-
-![NetBox Google login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_google_login.png)
-
-You should be redirected to Google's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
-
-![NetBox Google login form](../../media/authentication/google_login_portal.png)
-
-If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the Google user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
-
-This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.

docs/administration/authentication/microsoft-entra-id.md

@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-# Microsoft Entra ID
-
-This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Microsoft Entra ID](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/security/business/identity-access/microsoft-entra-id) as an authentication backend.
-
-## Entra ID Configuration
-
-### 1. Create a test user (optional)
-
-Create a new user in AD to be used for testing. You can skip this step if you already have a suitable account created.
-
-### 2. Create an app registration
-
-Under the Azure Active Directory dashboard, navigate to **Add > App registration**.
-
-![Add an app registration](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_add_app_registration.png)
-
-Enter a name for the registration (e.g. "NetBox") and ensure that the "single tenant" option is selected.
-
-Under "Redirect URI", select "Web" for the platform and enter the path to your NetBox installation, ending with `/oauth/complete/azuread-oauth2/`. Note that this URI **must** begin with `https://` unless you are referencing localhost (for development purposes).
-
-![App registration parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_app_registration.png)
-
-Once finished, make note of the application (client) ID; this will be used when configuring NetBox.
-
-![Completed app registration](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_app_registration_created.png)
-
-!!! tip "Multitenant authentication"
-    NetBox also supports multitenant authentication via Azure AD; however, it requires a different backend and an additional configuration parameter. Please see the [`python-social-auth` documentation](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/backends/azuread.html#tenant-support) for details concerning multitenant authentication.
-
-### 3. Create a secret
-
-When viewing the newly-created app registration, click the "Add a certificate or secret" link under "Client credentials". Under the "Client secrets" tab, click the "New client secret" button.
-
-![Add a client secret](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_add_client_secret.png)
-
-You can optionally specify a description and select a lifetime for the secret.
-
-![Client secret parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_client_secret.png)
-
-Once finished, make note of the secret value (not the secret ID); this will be used when configuring NetBox.
-
-![Client secret parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_client_secret_created.png)
-
-## NetBox Configuration
-
-### 1. Enter configuration parameters
-
-Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.azuread.AzureADOAuth2'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_AZUREAD_OAUTH2_KEY = '{APPLICATION_ID}'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_AZUREAD_OAUTH2_SECRET = '{SECRET_VALUE}'
-```
-
-### 2. Restart NetBox
-
-Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo systemctl restart netbox
-```
-
-## Testing
-
-Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Azure AD. Click that link.
-
-![NetBox Azure AD login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_azure_ad_login.png)
-
-You should be redirected to Microsoft's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
-
-![NetBox Azure AD login form](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_login_portal.png)
-
-If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the AD user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
-
-This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.
-
-## Troubleshooting
-
-### Redirect URI does not Match
-
-Azure requires that the authenticating client request a redirect URI that matches what you've configured for the app in step two. This URI **must** begin with `https://` (unless using `localhost` for the domain).
-
-If Azure complains that the requested URI starts with `http://` (not HTTPS), it's likely that your HTTP server is misconfigured or sitting behind a load balancer, so NetBox is not aware that HTTPS is being use. To force the use of an HTTPS redirect URI, set `SOCIAL_AUTH_REDIRECT_IS_HTTPS = True` in `configuration.py` per the [python-social-auth docs](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/configuration/settings.html#processing-redirects-and-urlopen).
-
-### Not Logged in After Authenticating
-
-If you are redirected to the NetBox UI after authenticating successfully, but are _not_ logged in, double-check the configured backend and app registration. The instructions in this guide pertain only to the `azuread.AzureADOAuth2` backend using a single-tenant app registration.

docs/administration/authentication/okta.md

@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-# Okta
-
-This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Okta](https://www.okta.com/) as an authentication backend.
-
-## Okta Configuration
-
-!!! tip "Okta developer account"
-    Okta offers free developer accounts at <https://developer.okta.com/>.
-
-### 1. Create a test user (optional)
-
-Create a new user in the Okta admin portal to be used for testing. You can skip this step if you already have a suitable account created.
-
-### 2. Create an app registration
-
-Within the Okta administration dashboard, navigate to  **Applications > Applications**, and click the "Create App Integration" button. Select "OIDC" as the sign-in method, and "Web application" for the application type.
-
-![Create an app registration](../../media/authentication/okta_create_app_registration.png)
-
-On the next page, give the app integration a name (e.g. "NetBox") and specify the sign-in and sign-out URIs. These URIs should follow the formats below:
-
-* Sign-in URI: `https://{netbox}/oauth/complete/okta-openidconnect/`
-* Sign-out URI: `https://{netbox}/oauth/disconnect/okta-openidconnect/`
-
-![Web app integration](../../media/authentication/okta_web_app_integration.png)
-
-Under "Assignments," select the controlled access setting most appropriate for your organization. Click "Save" to complete the creation.
-
-Once finished, note the following parameters. These will be used to configured NetBox.
-
-* Client ID
-* Client secret
-* Okta domain
-
-![Okta integration parameters](../../media/authentication/okta_integration_parameters.png)
-
-## NetBox Configuration
-
-### 1. Enter configuration parameters
-
-Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.okta_openidconnect.OktaOpenIdConnect'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_KEY = '{Client ID}'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_SECRET = '{Client secret}'
-SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_API_URL = 'https://{Okta domain}/oauth2/'
-```
-
-### 2. Restart NetBox
-
-Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo systemctl restart netbox
-```
-
-## Testing
-
-Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Okta. Click that link.
-
-![NetBox Okta login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_okta_login.png)
-
-You should be redirected to Okta's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
-
-![Okta login portal](../../media/authentication/okta_login_portal.png)
-
-If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the Okta user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
-
-This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.

docs/administration/authentication/overview.md

@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-# Authentication
-
-## Local Authentication
-
-Local user accounts and groups can be created in NetBox under the "Authentication" section in the "Admin" menu. This section is available only to users with the "staff" permission enabled.
-
-At a minimum, each user account must have a username and password set. User accounts may also denote a first name, last name, and email address. [Permissions](../permissions.md) may also be assigned to individual users and/or groups as needed.
-
-## Remote Authentication
-
-NetBox may be configured to provide user authenticate via a remote backend in addition to local authentication. This is done by setting the `REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND` configuration parameter to a suitable backend class. NetBox provides several options for remote authentication.
-
-### LDAP Authentication
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'netbox.authentication.LDAPBackend'
-```
-
-NetBox includes an authentication backend which supports LDAP. See the [LDAP installation docs](../../installation/6-ldap.md) for more detail about this backend.
-
-### HTTP Header Authentication
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend'
-```
-
-Another option for remote authentication in NetBox is to enable HTTP header-based user assignment. The front end HTTP server (e.g. nginx or Apache) performs client authentication as a process external to NetBox, and passes information about the authenticated user via HTTP headers. By default, the user is assigned via the `REMOTE_USER` header, but this can be customized via the `REMOTE_AUTH_HEADER` configuration parameter.
-
-Optionally, user profile information can be supplied by `REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME`, `REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME` and `REMOTE_USER_EMAIL` headers. These are saved to the user's profile during the authentication process. These headers can be customized like the `REMOTE_USER` header.
-
-!!! warning Verify Header Compatibility
-    Some WSGI servers may drop headers which contain unsupported characters. For instance, gunicorn v22.0 and later silently drops HTTP headers containing underscores. This behavior can be disabled by changing gunicorn's [`header_map`](https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map) setting to `dangerous`.
-
-### Single Sign-On (SSO)
-
-```python
-REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.google.GoogleOAuth2'
-```
-
-NetBox supports single sign-on authentication via the [python-social-auth](https://github.com/python-social-auth) library. To enable SSO, specify the path to the desired authentication backend within the `social_core` Python package. Please see the complete list of [supported authentication backends](https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-core/tree/master/social_core/backends) for the available options.
-
-Most remote authentication backends require some additional configuration through settings prefixed with `SOCIAL_AUTH_`. These will be automatically imported from NetBox's `configuration.py` file. Additionally, the [authentication pipeline](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/pipeline.html) can be customized via the `SOCIAL_AUTH_PIPELINE` parameter. (NetBox's default pipeline is defined in `netbox/settings.py` for your reference.)
-
-#### Configuring the SSO module's appearance
-
-The way a remote authentication backend is displayed to the user on the login
-page may be adjusted via the `SOCIAL_AUTH_BACKEND_ATTRS` parameter, defaulting
-to an empty dictionary. This dictionary maps a `social_core` module's name (ie.
-`REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND.name`) to a couple of parameters, `(display_name, icon)`.
-
-The `display_name` is the name displayed to the user on the login page. The
-icon may either be the URL of an icon; refer to a [Material Design
-Icons](https://github.com/google/material-design-icons) icon's name; or be
-`None` for no icon.
-
-For instance, the OIDC backend may be customized with
-
-```python
-SOCIAL_AUTH_BACKEND_ATTRS = {
-    'oidc': ("My awesome SSO", "login"),
-}
-```

docs/administration/error-reporting.md

@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-# Error Reporting
-
-## Sentry
-
-### Enabling Error Reporting
-
-NetBox supports native integration with [Sentry](https://sentry.io/) for automatic error reporting. To enable this functionality, set `SENTRY_ENABLED` to `True` and define your unique [data source name (DSN)](https://docs.sentry.io/product/sentry-basics/concepts/dsn-explainer/) in `configuration.py`.
-
-```python
-SENTRY_ENABLED = True
-SENTRY_DSN = "https://examplePublicKey@o0.ingest.sentry.io/0"
-```
-
-Setting `SENTRY_ENABLED` to False will disable the Sentry integration.
-
-### Assigning Tags
-
-You can optionally attach one or more arbitrary tags to the outgoing error reports if desired by setting the `SENTRY_TAGS` parameter:
-
-```python
-SENTRY_TAGS = {
-    "custom.foo": "123",
-    "custom.bar": "abc",
-}
-```
-
-!!! warning "Reserved tag prefixes"
-    Avoid using any tag names which begin with `netbox.`, as this prefix is reserved by the NetBox application.
-
-### Testing
-
-Once the configuration has been saved, restart the NetBox service.
-
-To test Sentry operation, try generating a 404 (page not found) error by navigating to an invalid URL, such as `https://netbox/404-error-testing`. (Be sure that debug mode has been disabled.) After receiving a 404 response from the NetBox server, you should see the issue appear shortly in Sentry.

docs/administration/permissions.md

@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-# Object-Based Permissions
-
-NetBox employs a new object-based permissions framework, which replaces Django's built-in permissions model. Object-based permissions enable an administrator to grant users or groups the ability to perform an action on arbitrary subsets of objects in NetBox, rather than all objects of a certain type. For example, it is possible to grant a user permission to view only sites within a particular region, or to modify only VLANs with a numeric ID within a certain range.
-
-A permission in NetBox represents a relationship shared by several components:
-
-* Object type(s) - One or more types of object in NetBox
-* User(s)/Group(s) - One or more users or groups of users
-* Action(s) - The action(s) that can be performed on an object
-* Constraints - An arbitrary filter used to limit the granted action(s) to a specific subset of objects
-
-At a minimum, a permission assignment must specify one object type, one user or group, and one action. The specification of constraints is optional: A permission without any constraints specified will apply to all instances of the selected model(s).
-
-## Actions
-
-There are four core actions that can be permitted for each type of object within NetBox, roughly analogous to the CRUD convention (create, read, update, and delete):
-
-* **View** - Retrieve an object from the database
-* **Add** - Create a new object
-* **Change** - Modify an existing object
-* **Delete** - Delete an existing object
-
-In addition to these, permissions can also grant custom actions that may be required by a specific model or plugin. For example, the `run` permission for scripts allows a user to execute custom scripts. These can be specified when granting a permission in the "additional actions" field.
-
-!!! note
-    Internally, all actions granted by a permission (both built-in and custom) are stored as strings in an array field named `actions`.
-
-## Constraints
-
-Constraints are expressed as a JSON object or list representing a [Django query filter](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/models/querysets/#field-lookups). This is the same syntax that you would pass to the QuerySet `filter()` method when performing a query using the Django ORM. As with query filters, double underscores can be used to traverse related objects or invoke lookup expressions. Some example queries and their corresponding definitions are shown below.
-
-All attributes defined within a single JSON object are applied with a logical AND. For example, suppose you assign a permission for the site model with the following constraints.
-
-```json
-{
-  "status": "active",
-  "region__name": "Americas"
-}
-```
-
-The permission will grant access only to sites which have a status of "active" **and** which are assigned to the "Americas" region.
-
-To achieve a logical OR with a different set of constraints, define multiple objects within a list. For example, if you want to constrain the permission to VLANs with an ID between 100 and 199 _or_ a status of "reserved," do the following:
-
-```json
-[
-  {
-    "vid__gte": 100,
-    "vid__lt": 200
-  },
-  {
-    "status": "reserved"
-  }
-]
-```
-
-Additionally, where multiple permissions have been assigned for an object type, their collective constraints will be merged using a logical "OR" operation.
-
-### User Token
-
-When defining a permission constraint, administrators may use the special token `$user` to reference the current user at the time of evaluation. This can be helpful to restrict users to editing only their own journal entries, for example. Such a constraint might be defined as:
-
-```json
-{
-  "created_by": "$user"
-}
-```
-
-The `$user` token can be used only as a constraint value, or as an item within a list of values. It cannot be modified or extended to reference specific user attributes.
-
-### Default Permissions
-
-While permissions are typically assigned to specific groups and/or users, it is also possible to define a set of default permissions that are applied to _all_ authenticated users. This is done using the [`DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS`](../configuration/security.md#default_permissions) configuration parameter. Note that statically configuring permissions for specific users or groups is **not** supported.
-
-### Example Constraint Definitions
-
-| Constraints | Description |
-| ----------- | ----------- |
-| `{"status": "active"}` | Status is active |
-| `{"status__in": ["planned", "reserved"]}` | Status is active **OR** reserved |
-| `{"status": "active", "role": "testing"}` | Status is active **AND** role is testing |
-| `{"name__startswith": "Foo"}` | Name starts with "Foo" (case-sensitive) |
-| `{"name__iendswith": "bar"}` | Name ends with "bar" (case-insensitive) |
-| `{"vid__gte": 100, "vid__lt": 200}` | VLAN ID is greater than or equal to 100 **AND** less than 200 |
-| `[{"vid__lt": 200}, {"status": "reserved"}]` | VLAN ID is less than 200 **OR** status is reserved |
-
-## Permissions Enforcement
-
-### Viewing Objects
-
-Object-based permissions work by filtering the database query generated by a user's request to restrict the set of objects returned. When a request is received, NetBox first determines whether the user is authenticated and has been granted to perform the requested action. For example, if the requested URL is `/dcim/devices/`, NetBox will check for the `dcim.view_device` permission. If the user has not been assigned this permission (either directly or via a group assignment), NetBox will return a 403 (forbidden) HTTP response.
-
-If the permission _has_ been granted, NetBox will compile any specified constraints for the model and action. For example, suppose two permissions have been assigned to the user granting view access to the device model, with the following constraints:
-
-```json
-[
-    {"site__name__in":  ["NYC1", "NYC2"]},
-    {"status":  "offline", "tenant__isnull":  true}
-]
-```
-
-This grants the user access to view any device that is assigned to a site named NYC1 or NYC2, **or** which has a status of "offline" and has no tenant assigned. These constraints are equivalent to the following ORM query:
-
-```no-highlight
-Site.objects.filter(
-    Q(site__name__in=['NYC1', 'NYC2']),
-    Q(status='active', tenant__isnull=True)
-)
-```
-
-### Creating and Modifying Objects
-
-The same sort of logic is in play when a user attempts to create or modify an object in NetBox, with a twist. Once validation has completed, NetBox starts an atomic database transaction to facilitate the change, and the object is created or saved normally. Next, still within the transaction, NetBox issues a second query to retrieve the newly created/updated object, filtering the restricted queryset with the object's primary key. If this query fails to return the object, NetBox knows that the new revision does not match the constraints imposed by the permission. The transaction is then rolled back, leaving the database in its original state prior to the change, and the user is informed of the violation.

docs/administration/replicating-netbox.md

@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-# Replicating NetBox
-
-## Replicating the Database
-
-NetBox employs a [PostgreSQL](https://www.postgresql.org/) database, so general PostgreSQL best practices apply here. The database can be written to a file and restored using the `pg_dump` and `psql` utilities, respectively.
-
-!!! note
-    The examples below assume that your database is named `netbox`.
-
-### Export the Database
-
-Use the `pg_dump` utility to export the entire database to a file:
-
-```no-highlight
-pg_dump --username netbox --password --host localhost netbox > netbox.sql
-```
-
-!!! note
-    You may need to change the username, host, and/or database in the command above to match your installation.
-
-When replicating a production database for development purposes, you may find it convenient to exclude changelog data, which can easily account for the bulk of a database's size. To do this, exclude the `core_objectchange` table data from the export. The table will still be included in the output file, but will not be populated with any data.
-
-```no-highlight
-pg_dump ... --exclude-table-data=core_objectchange netbox > netbox.sql
-```
-
-### Load an Exported Database
-
-When restoring a database from a file, it's recommended to delete any existing database first to avoid potential conflicts.
-
-!!! warning
-    The following will destroy and replace any existing instance of the database.
-
-```no-highlight
-psql -c 'drop database netbox'
-psql -c 'create database netbox'
-psql netbox < netbox.sql
-```
-
-Keep in mind that PostgreSQL user accounts and permissions are not included with the dump: You will need to create those manually if you want to fully replicate the original database (see the [installation docs](../installation/1-postgresql.md)). When setting up a development instance of NetBox, it's strongly recommended to use different credentials anyway.
-
-### Export the Database Schema
-
-If you want to export only the database schema, and not the data itself (e.g. for development reference), do the following:
-
-```no-highlight
-pg_dump --username netbox --password --host localhost -s netbox > netbox_schema.sql
-```
-
----
-
-## Replicating Uploaded Media
-
-By default, NetBox stores uploaded files (such as image attachments) in its media directory. To fully replicate an instance of NetBox, you'll need to copy both the database and the media files.
-
-!!! note
-    These operations are not necessary if your installation is utilizing a [remote storage backend](../configuration/system.md#storages).
-
-### Archive the Media Directory
-
-Execute the following command from the root of the NetBox installation path (typically `/opt/netbox`):
-
-```no-highlight
-tar -czf netbox_media.tar.gz netbox/media/
-```
-
-### Restore the Media Directory
-
-To extract the saved archive into a new installation, run the following from the installation root:
-
-```no-highlight
-tar -xf netbox_media.tar.gz
-```

docs/api/authentication.md

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+The NetBox API employs token-based authentication. For convenience, cookie authentication can also be used when navigating the browsable API.
+
+# Tokens
+
+A token is a unique identifier that identifies a user to the API. Each user in NetBox may have one or more tokens which he or she can use to authenticate to the API. To create a token, navigate to the API tokens page at `/user/api-tokens/`.
+
+Each token contains a 160-bit key represented as 40 hexadecimal characters. When creating a token, you'll typically leave the key field blank so that a random key will be automatically generated. However, NetBox allows you to specify a key in case you need to restore a previously deleted token to operation.
+
+By default, a token can be used for all operations available via the API. Deselecting the "write enabled" option will restrict API requests made with the token to read operations (e.g. GET) only.
+
+Additionally, a token can be set to expire at a specific time. This can be useful if an external client needs to be granted temporary access to NetBox.
+
+# Authenticating to the API
+
+By default, read operations will be available without authentication. In this case, a token may be included in the request, but is not necessary.
+
+```
+$ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/
+{
+    "count": 10,
+    "next": null,
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [...]
+}
+```
+
+However, if the [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../configuration/optional-settings/#login_required) configuration setting has been set to `True`, all requests must be authenticated.
+
+```
+$ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/
+{
+    "detail": "Authentication credentials were not provided."
+}
+```
+
+To authenticate to the API, set the HTTP `Authorization` header to the string `Token ` (note the trailing space) followed by the token key.
+
+```
+$ curl -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/
+{
+    "count": 10,
+    "next": null,
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [...]
+}
+```
+
+Additionally, the browsable interface to the API (which can be seen by navigating to the API root `/api/` in a web browser) will attempt to authenticate requests using the same cookie that the normal NetBox front end uses. Thus, if you have logged into NetBox, you will be logged into the browsable API as well.

docs/api/examples.md

@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+# API Examples
+
+Supported HTTP methods:
+
+* `GET`: Retrieve an object or list of objects
+* `POST`: Create a new object
+* `PUT`: Update an existing object, all mandatory fields must be specified
+* `PATCH`: Updates an existing object, only specifiying the field to be changed
+* `DELETE`: Delete an existing object
+
+To authenticate a request, attach your token in an `Authorization` header:
+
+```
+curl -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0"
+```
+
+### Retrieving a list of sites
+
+Send a `GET` request to the object list endpoint. The response contains a paginated list of JSON objects.
+
+```
+$ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/
+{
+    "count": 14,
+    "next": null,
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [
+        {
+            "id": 6,
+            "name": "Corporate HQ",
+            "slug": "corporate-hq",
+            "region": null,
+            "tenant": null,
+            "facility": "",
+            "asn": null,
+            "physical_address": "742 Evergreen Terrace, Springfield, USA",
+            "shipping_address": "",
+            "contact_name": "",
+            "contact_phone": "",
+            "contact_email": "",
+            "comments": "",
+            "custom_fields": {},
+            "count_prefixes": 108,
+            "count_vlans": 46,
+            "count_racks": 8,
+            "count_devices": 254,
+            "count_circuits": 6
+        },
+        ...
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+### Retrieving a single site by ID
+
+Send a `GET` request to the object detail endpoint. The response contains a single JSON object.
+
+```
+$ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/6/
+{
+    "id": 6,
+    "name": "Corporate HQ",
+    "slug": "corporate-hq",
+    "region": null,
+    "tenant": null,
+    "facility": "",
+    "asn": null,
+    "physical_address": "742 Evergreen Terrace, Springfield, USA",
+    "shipping_address": "",
+    "contact_name": "",
+    "contact_phone": "",
+    "contact_email": "",
+    "comments": "",
+    "custom_fields": {},
+    "count_prefixes": 108,
+    "count_vlans": 46,
+    "count_racks": 8,
+    "count_devices": 254,
+    "count_circuits": 6
+}
+```
+
+### Creating a new site
+
+Send a `POST` request to the site list endpoint with token authentication and JSON-formatted data. Only mandatory fields are required. This example includes one non required field, "region."
+
+```
+$ curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/ --data '{"name": "My New Site", "slug": "my-new-site", "region": 5}'
+{
+    "id": 16,
+    "name": "My New Site",
+    "slug": "my-new-site",
+    "region": 5,
+    "tenant": null,
+    "facility": "",
+    "asn": null,
+    "physical_address": "",
+    "shipping_address": "",
+    "contact_name": "",
+    "contact_phone": "",
+    "contact_email": "",
+    "comments": ""
+}
+```
+Note that in this example we are creating a site bound to a region with the ID of 5. For write API actions (`POST`, `PUT`, and `PATCH`) the integer ID value is used for `ForeignKey` (related model) relationships, instead of the nested representation that is used in the `GET` (list) action.
+
+### Modify an existing site
+
+Make an authenticated `PUT` request to the site detail endpoint. As with a create (`POST`) request, all mandatory fields must be included.
+
+```
+$ curl -X PUT -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/16/ --data '{"name": "Renamed Site", "slug": "renamed-site"}'
+```
+
+### Modify an object by changing a field
+
+Make an authenticated `PATCH` request to the device endpoint. With `PATCH`, unlike `POST` and `PUT`, we only specify the field that is being changed. In this example, we add a serial number to a device.
+```
+$ curl -X PATCH -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/2549/ --data '{"serial": "FTX1123A090"}'
+```
+
+### Delete an existing site
+
+Send an authenticated `DELETE` request to the site detail endpoint.
+
+```
+$ curl -v -X DELETE -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/16/
+* Connected to localhost (127.0.0.1) port 8000 (#0)
+> DELETE /api/dcim/sites/16/ HTTP/1.1
+> User-Agent: curl/7.35.0
+> Host: localhost:8000
+> Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0
+> Content-Type: application/json
+> Accept: application/json; indent=4
+>
+* HTTP 1.0, assume close after body
+< HTTP/1.0 204 No Content
+< Date: Mon, 20 Mar 2017 16:13:08 GMT
+< Server: WSGIServer/0.1 Python/2.7.6
+< Vary: Accept, Cookie
+< X-Frame-Options: SAMEORIGIN
+< Allow: GET, PUT, PATCH, DELETE, OPTIONS
+<
+* Closing connection 0
+```
+
+The response to a successfull `DELETE` request will have code 204 (No Content); the body of the response will be empty.

docs/api/overview.md

@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+NetBox v2.0 and later includes a full-featured REST API that allows its data model to be read and manipulated externally.
+
+# What is a REST API?
+
+REST stands for [representational state transfer](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Representational_state_transfer). It's a particular type of API which employs HTTP to create, retrieve, update, and delete objects from a database. (This set of operations is commonly referred to as CRUD.) Each type of operation is associated with a particular HTTP verb:
+
+* `GET`: Retrieve an object or list of objects
+* `POST`: Create an object
+* `PUT` / `PATCH`: Modify an existing object. `PUT` requires all mandatory fields to be specified, while `PATCH` only expects the field that is being modified to be specified.
+* `DELETE`: Delete an existing object
+
+The NetBox API represents all objects in [JavaScript Object Notation (JSON)](http://www.json.org/). This makes it very easy to interact with NetBox data on the command line with common tools. For example, we can request an IP address from NetBox and output the JSON using `curl` and `jq`. (Piping the output through `jq` isn't strictly required but makes it much easier to read.)
+
+```
+$ curl -s http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/ip-addresses/2954/ | jq '.'
+{
+  "custom_fields": {},
+  "nat_outside": null,
+  "nat_inside": null,
+  "description": "An example IP address",
+  "id": 2954,
+  "family": 4,
+  "address": "5.101.108.132/26",
+  "vrf": null,
+  "tenant": null,
+  "status": {
+    "label": "Active",
+    "value": 1
+  },
+  "role": null,
+  "interface": null
+}
+```
+
+Each attribute of the NetBox object is expressed as a field in the dictionary. Fields may include their own nested objects, as in the case of the `status` field above. Every object includes a primary key named `id` which uniquely identifies it in the database.
+
+# URL Hierarchy
+
+NetBox's entire API is housed under the API root at `https://<hostname>/api/`. The URL structure is divided at the root level by application: circuits, DCIM, extras, IPAM, secrets, and tenancy. Within each application, each model has its own path. For example, the provider and circuit objects are located under the "circuits" application:
+
+* /api/circuits/providers/
+* /api/circuits/circuits/
+
+Likewise, the site, rack, and device objects are located under the "DCIM" application:
+
+* /api/dcim/sites/
+* /api/dcim/racks/
+* /api/dcim/devices/
+
+The full hierarchy of available endpoints can be viewed by navigating to the API root in a web browser.
+
+Each model generally has two views associated with it: a list view and a detail view. The list view is used to request a list of multiple objects or to create a new object. The detail view is used to retrieve, update, or delete an existing object. All objects are referenced by their numeric primary key (`id`).
+
+* /api/dcim/devices/ - List devices or create a new device
+* /api/dcim/devices/123/ - Retrieve, update, or delete the device with ID 123
+
+Lists of objects can be filtered using a set of query parameters. For example, to find all interfaces belonging to the device with ID 123:
+
+```
+GET /api/dcim/interfaces/?device_id=123
+```
+
+# Serialization
+
+The NetBox API employs three types of serializers to represent model data:
+
+* Base serializer
+* Nested serializer
+* Writable serializer
+
+The base serializer is used to represent the default view of a model. This includes all database table fields which comprise the model, and may include additional metadata. A base serializer includes relationships to parent objects, but **does not** include child objects. For example, the `VLANSerializer` includes a nested representation its parent VLANGroup (if any), but does not include any assigned Prefixes.
+
+```
+{
+    "id": 1048,
+    "site": {
+        "id": 7,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/7/",
+        "name": "Corporate HQ",
+        "slug": "corporate-hq"
+    },
+    "group": {
+        "id": 4,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/vlan-groups/4/",
+        "name": "Production",
+        "slug": "production"
+    },
+    "vid": 101,
+    "name": "Users-Floor1",
+    "tenant": null,
+    "status": {
+        "value": 1,
+        "label": "Active"
+    },
+    "role": {
+        "id": 9,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/roles/9/",
+        "name": "User Access",
+        "slug": "user-access"
+    },
+    "description": "",
+    "display_name": "101 (Users-Floor1)",
+    "custom_fields": {}
+}
+```
+
+Related objects (e.g. `ForeignKey` fields) are represented using a nested serializer. A nested serializer provides a minimal representation of an object, including only its URL and enough information to construct its name. When performing write api actions (`POST`, `PUT`, and `PATCH`), any `ForeignKey` relationships do not use the nested serializer, instead you will pass just the integer ID of the related model.  
+
+When a base serializer includes one or more nested serializers, the hierarchical structure precludes it from being used for write operations. Thus, a flat representation of an object may be provided using a writable serializer. This serializer includes only raw database values and is not typically used for retrieval, except as part of the response to the creation or updating of an object.
+
+```
+{
+    "id": 1201,
+    "site": 7,
+    "group": 4,
+    "vid": 102,
+    "name": "Users-Floor2",
+    "tenant": null,
+    "status": 1,
+    "role": 9,
+    "description": ""
+}
+```
+
+## Static Choice Fields
+
+Some model fields, such as the `status` field in the above example, utilize static integers corresponding to static choices. The available choices can be retrieved from the read-only `_choices` endpoint within each app. A specific `model:field` tuple may optionally be specified in the URL.
+
+Each choice includes a human-friendly label and its corresponding numeric value. For example, `GET /api/ipam/_choices/prefix:status/` will return:
+
+```
+[
+    {
+        "value": 0,
+        "label": "Container"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 1,
+        "label": "Active"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 2,
+        "label": "Reserved"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 3,
+        "label": "Deprecated"
+    }
+]
+```
+
+Thus, to set a prefix's status to "Reserved," it would be assigned the integer `2`.
+
+A request for `GET /api/ipam/_choices/` will return choices for _all_ fields belonging to models within the IPAM app.
+
+# Pagination
+
+API responses which contain a list of objects (for example, a request to `/api/dcim/devices/`) will be paginated to avoid unnecessary overhead. The root JSON object will contain the following attributes:
+
+* `count`: The total count of all objects matching the query
+* `next`: A hyperlink to the next page of results (if applicable)
+* `previous`: A hyperlink to the previous page of results (if applicable)
+* `results`: The list of returned objects
+
+Here is an example of a paginated response:
+
+```
+HTTP 200 OK
+Allow: GET, POST, OPTIONS
+Content-Type: application/json
+Vary: Accept
+
+{
+    "count": 2861,
+    "next": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/?limit=50&offset=50",
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [
+        {
+            "id": 123,
+            "name": "DeviceName123",
+            ...
+        },
+        ...
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+The default page size derives from the [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](../configuration/optional-settings/#paginate_count) configuration setting, which defaults to 50. However, this can be overridden per request by specifying the desired `offset` and `limit` query parameters. For example, if you wish to retrieve a hundred devices at a time, you would make a request for:
+
+```
+http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/?limit=100
+```
+
+The response will return devices 1 through 100. The URL provided in the `next` attribute of the response will return devices 101 through 200:
+
+```
+{
+    "count": 2861,
+    "next": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/?limit=100&offset=100",
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [...]
+}
+```
+
+The maximum number of objects that can be returned is limited by the [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](../configuration/optional-settings/#max_page_size) setting, which is 1000 by default. Setting this to `0` or `None` will remove the maximum limit. An API consumer can then pass `?limit=0` to retrieve _all_ matching objects with a single request.
+
+!!! warning
+    Disabling the page size limit introduces a potential for very resource-intensive requests, since one API request can effectively retrieve an entire table from the database.

docs/api/working-with-secrets.md

@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+As with most other objects, the NetBox API can be used to create, modify, and delete secrets. However, additional steps are needed to encrypt or decrypt secret data.
+
+# Generating a Session Key
+
+In order to encrypt or decrypt secret data, a session key must be attached to the API request. To generate a session key, send an authenticated request to the `/api/secrets/get-session-key/` endpoint with the private RSA key which matches your [UserKey](../data-model/secrets/#user-keys). The private key must be POSTed with the name `private_key`.
+
+```
+$ curl -X POST http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/get-session-key/ \
+-H "Authorization: Token c639d619ecbeb1f3055c4141ba6870e20572edd7" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+--data-urlencode "private_key@<filename>"
+{
+    "session_key": "dyEnxlc9lnGzaOAV1dV/xqYPV63njIbdZYOgnAlGPHk="
+}
+```
+
+!!! note
+    To read the private key from a file, use the convention above. Alternatively, the private key can be read from an environment variable using `--data-urlencode "private_key=$PRIVATE_KEY"`.
+
+The request uses your private key to unlock your stored copy of the master key and generate a session key which can be attached in the `X-Session-Key` header of future API requests.
+
+# Retrieving Secrets
+
+A session key is not needed to retrieve unencrypted secrets: The secret is returned like any normal object with its `plaintext` field set to null.
+
+```
+$ curl http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secrets/2587/ \
+-H "Authorization: Token c639d619ecbeb1f3055c4141ba6870e20572edd7" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4"
+{
+    "id": 2587,
+    "device": {
+        "id": 1827,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/1827/",
+        "name": "MyTestDevice",
+        "display_name": "MyTestDevice"
+    },
+    "role": {
+        "id": 1,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secret-roles/1/",
+        "name": "Login Credentials",
+        "slug": "login-creds"
+    },
+    "name": "admin",
+    "plaintext": null,
+    "hash": "pbkdf2_sha256$1000$G6mMFe4FetZQ$f+0itZbAoUqW5pd8+NH8W5rdp/2QNLIBb+LGdt4OSKA=",
+    "created": "2017-03-21",
+    "last_updated": "2017-03-21T19:28:44.265582Z"
+}
+```
+
+To decrypt a secret, we must include our session key in the `X-Session-Key` header:
+
+```
+$ curl http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secrets/2587/ \
+-H "Authorization: Token c639d619ecbeb1f3055c4141ba6870e20572edd7" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+-H "X-Session-Key: dyEnxlc9lnGzaOAV1dV/xqYPV63njIbdZYOgnAlGPHk="
+{
+    "id": 2587,
+    "device": {
+        "id": 1827,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/1827/",
+        "name": "MyTestDevice",
+        "display_name": "MyTestDevice"
+    },
+    "role": {
+        "id": 1,
+        "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secret-roles/1/",
+        "name": "Login Credentials",
+        "slug": "login-creds"
+    },
+    "name": "admin",
+    "plaintext": "foobar",
+    "hash": "pbkdf2_sha256$1000$G6mMFe4FetZQ$f+0itZbAoUqW5pd8+NH8W5rdp/2QNLIBb+LGdt4OSKA=",
+    "created": "2017-03-21",
+    "last_updated": "2017-03-21T19:28:44.265582Z"
+}
+```
+
+Lists of secrets can be decrypted in this manner as well:
+
+```
+$ curl http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secrets/?limit=3 \
+-H "Authorization: Token c639d619ecbeb1f3055c4141ba6870e20572edd7" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+-H "X-Session-Key: dyEnxlc9lnGzaOAV1dV/xqYPV63njIbdZYOgnAlGPHk="
+{
+    "count": 3482,
+    "next": "http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secrets/?limit=3&offset=3",
+    "previous": null,
+    "results": [
+        {
+            "id": 2587,
+            ...
+            "plaintext": "foobar",
+            ...
+        },
+        {
+            "id": 2588,
+            ...
+            "plaintext": "MyP@ssw0rd!",
+            ...
+        },
+        {
+            "id": 2589,
+            ...
+            "plaintext": "AnotherSecret!",
+            ...
+        },
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+# Creating Secrets
+
+Session keys are also used to decrypt new or modified secrets. This is done by setting the `plaintext` field of the submitted object:
+
+```
+$ curl -X POST http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/secrets/ \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+-H "Authorization: Token c639d619ecbeb1f3055c4141ba6870e20572edd7" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+-H "X-Session-Key: dyEnxlc9lnGzaOAV1dV/xqYPV63njIbdZYOgnAlGPHk=" \
+--data '{"device": 1827, "role": 1, "name": "backup", "plaintext": "Drowssap1"}'
+{
+    "id": 2590,
+    "device": 1827,
+    "role": 1,
+    "name": "backup",
+    "plaintext": "Drowssap1"
+}
+```
+
+!!! note
+    Don't forget to include the `Content-Type: application/json` header when making a POST request.

docs/best-practices/modeling-pluggable-transceivers.md

@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-# Modeling Pluggable Transceivers
-
-## Use Case
-
-Many network devices utilize field-swappable [small-form factor pluggable transceivers (SFPs)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Small_Form-factor_Pluggable) to enable changing the physical media type of a fixed interface. For example, a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface might be connected using copper, multimode fiber, or single-mode fiber, each of which requires a different type of SFP+ transceiver.
-
-It can be challenging to model SFPs given their dynamic nature. This guide intends to capture the recommended strategy for modeling SFPs on NetBox v4.4 and later.
-
-## Modeling Strategy
-
-Pluggable transceivers are most accurately represented in NetBox as discrete [modules](../models/dcim/module.md) which are installed within [module bays](../models/dcim/modulebay.md). A module can deliver one or more [interfaces](../models/dcim/interface.md) (or other components) to the device in which it is installed. This approach ensures that a new interface is automatically created on the device when the module is installed, and deleted when the module is removed.
-
-```mermaid
-flowchart BT
-    interface1[Interface 1/1]--> module1[SFP]
-    interface2[Interface 2/1]--> module2[SFP]
-    interface3[Interface 3/1] & interface4[Interface 3/2]--> module3[SFP]
-    module1 --> modulebay1[Module Bay 1]
-    module2 --> modulebay2[Module Bay 2]
-    module3 --> modulebay3[Module Bay 3]
-    modulebay1 & modulebay2 & modulebay3 --> device[Device]
-```
-
-### 1. Create an SFP Module Type Profile
-
-If one has not already been defined, create a [module type profile](../models/dcim/moduletypeprofile.md) for SFPs. This profile will be assigned for all module types which represent a pluggable transceiver. Typically, you will need only one profile for all pluggable transceivers.
-
-You might opt to define custom attributes for the profile by defining a custom [JSON schema](https://json-schema.org/). Profile attributes might be used to define characteristics unique to transceivers, such as optical wavelength and power ranges. Adding profile attributes is optional, and can be done at a later point.
-
-!!! note
-    Creating a module type profile is optional, but recommended as it allows for defining custom module attributes.
-
-### 2. Create a Module Type for Each SFP Model in Inventory
-
-Next, create a [module type](../models/dcim/moduletype.md) to represent each unique SFP model present in your network. Each module type should define a manufacturer and a unique model name, and may also include a part number. For example, you might create a module type for each of the following transceivers:
-
-| Manufacturer | Model            | Media Type |
-|--------------|------------------|------------|
-| Cisco        | SFP-10G-SR       | 10GE MMF   |
-| Cisco        | SFP-10G-LR       | 10GE SMF   |
-| Juniper      | QFX-QSFP-40G-SR4 | 40GE MMF   |
-| Juniper      | JNP-QSFP-DAC-5M  | 40GE DAC   |
-
-### 3. Add an Interface to the Module Type
-
-After creating each module type, create an interface template on it to represent its physical interface. The definition of this interface template will depend on the transceiver's physical media type. (Reference the table above for examples.) When a new module is "installed" within a module bay on a device, its templated interface(s) will be automatically instantiated on that device as child interfaces of the module.
-
-Determining which name to use for the transceiver's interface can be tricky, as the interface name might depend on the type of device in which the SFP is installed. To avoid having to rename interfaces, consider using the `{module}` token in place of a static interface name. The interface's name will inherit the position of the bay in which its parent module is installed. If creating multiple interfaces on a module, be sure to append a unique ID (e.g. `{module}:1`) to ensure each interface gets assigned a unique name.
-
-### 4. Create Device Types
-
-If you haven't already, create a [device type](../models/dcim/devicetype.md) to represent each unique device model in your network.
-
-!!! note
-    Skip this step if you've already created the necessary device types.
-
-### 5. Add Module Bays to the Device Type
-
-Once you've created a device type, add the appropriate number of module bays on each device type to represent its SFP slots. For example, a Juniper QFX5110 would have module bays numbered `0/0/0` through `0/0/55`: 48 SFP+ bays and 8 QSFP28 bays (56 total).
-
-Be sure to define both the name **and position** of each module bay with a unique value. The module bay's position will be used to automatically name SFP interfaces.
-
-### 6. Create a Device
-
-Create a new device using the device type added in the previous step. The module bays (and any other components) defined on the device type will be instantiated on the new device automatically.
-
-!!! note
-    If you've already created the necessary devices in NetBox, you'll need to add their module bays manually. You can add multiple module bays at once by selecting the desired devices from the device list and selecting **Add Components > Module Bays** at the bottom of the page.
-
-### 7. Add the SFP Modules
-
-Finally, create each SFP in the new device by "installing" a new module of the appropriate type in each module bay. The interface(s) defined on the selected module type will be automatically populated on the new module. If present, the `{module}` token in the name of each interface template will be replaced with the position of the bay in which the module is being installed. For example, an interface template with the name `et-{module}` being created on a module installed in a bay with position `0/0/14` will create an interface named `et-0/0/14`.
-
-When adding many modules at once, you may find it helpful to utilize NetBox's bulk import functionality. This allows you to create many modules at once from CSV, JSON, or YAML data.

docs/best-practices/performance-handbook.md

@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
-# Performance Handbook
-
-The purpose of this handbook is to help users and administrators use NetBox efficiently. It contains assorted recommendations and best practices compiled over time, intending to serve a wide variety of use cases. 
-
-## Server Configuration
-
-### WSGI Server Configuration
-
-NetBox operates as a [Web Server Gateway Interface (WSGI)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Server_Gateway_Interface) application, which sits behind a frontend HTTP server such as nginx or Apache. The HTTP server handles low-level HTTP request processing and serving static assets, and forwards application-level requests to NetBox via WSGI.
-
-A backend WSGI server (typically [Gunicorn](https://gunicorn.org/) or [uWSGI](https://uwsgi-docs.readthedocs.io/en/latest/)) is responsible for running the NetBox application. This is accomplished by initializing a number of WSGI worker processes which accept WSGI requests relayed from the frontend HTTP server.
-
-Tuning your WSGI server is crucial to realizing optimal performance from NetBox. Below are some recommended configuration parameters.
-
-#### Provision Multiple Workers
-
-General guidance is to set the number of worker processes to double the number of CPU cores available, plus one (`2 * CPUs + 1`).
-
-#### Limit the Worker Lifetime
-
-Set a maximum number of requests that a worker can service before being respawned. This helps protect against potential memory leaks.
-
-#### Set a Request Timeout
-
-Limit the time a worker may spend processing any request. This prevents a long-running request from tying up a worker beyond an acceptable threshold. We suggest a limit of 120 seconds as a reasonable safeguard.
-
-#### Bind Using a Unix Socket
-
-When running the HTTP frontend and WSGI server on the same machine, binding via a Unix socket (instead of a TCP socket) may yield slight performance gains.
-
-### NetBox Configuration
-
-NetBox ships with a reasonable default configuration for most environments, but administrators are encouraged to explore all the [available parameters](../configuration/index.md) to tune their installation. Some of the most notable parameters impacting performance are called out below.
-
-#### Reduce the Maximum Page Size
-
-NetBox paginates large result sets to reduce the overall response size. The [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#max_page_size) parameter specifies the maximum number of results per page that a client can request. This is set to 1,000 by default. Consider lowering this number if you find that API clients are frequently requesting very large result sets.
-
-#### Limit GraphQL Aliases
-
-By default, NetBox restricts a GraphQL query to 10 aliases. Consider reducing this number by setting [`GRAPHQL_MAX_ALIASES`](../configuration/graphql-api.md#graphql_max_aliases) to a lower value.
-
-#### Designate Isolated Deployments
-
-If your NetBox installation does not have Internet access, set [`ISOLATED_DEPLOYMENT`](../configuration/system.md#isolated_deployment) to True. This will prevent the application from attempting routine external requests.
-
-#### Reduce Sentry Sampling
-
-If [Sentry](https://sentry.io/) has been enabled for error reporting and analytics, consider lowering its sampling rate. This can be accomplished by modifying the values for `sample_rate` and `traces_sample_rate` under [`SENTRY_CONFIG`](../configuration/error-reporting.md#sentry_config).
-
-#### Remove Unneeded Event Handlers
-
-Check whether any custom event handlers have been added under [`EVENTS_PIPELINE`](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#events_pipeline). Remove any that are no longer needed.
-
-### Background Task Workers
-
-NetBox defers the execution of certain tasks to background workers via Redis queues serviced by one or more background workers. These workers operate asynchronously from the frontend WSGI workers, and process tasks in the order they are enqueued.
-
-NetBox creates three default queues for background tasks: `high`, `default`, and `low`. Additional queues can be configured via the [`QUEUE_MAPPINGS`](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#queue_mappings) configuration parameter.
-
-By default, a background worker (spawned via `manage.py rqworker`) will listen to all available queues. To improve responsiveness to high-priority background tasks, consider dedicating one or more workers to service the `high` queue only:
-
-```
-$ ./manage.py rqworker high
-19:31:20 Worker 861be45b32214afc95c235beeb19c9fa: started with PID 2300029, version 2.6.0
-19:31:20 Worker 861be45b32214afc95c235beeb19c9fa: subscribing to channel rq:pubsub:861be45b32214afc95c235beeb19c9fa
-19:31:20 *** Listening on high...
-19:31:20 Worker 861be45b32214afc95c235beeb19c9fa: cleaning registries for queue: high
-19:31:20 Scheduler for high started with PID 2300096
-```
-
-## API Clients
-
-### REST API
-
-NetBox's [REST API](../integrations/rest-api.md) is the primary means of integration with external systems, allowing full create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. There are a few performance considerations to keep in mind when dealing with very large data sets.
-
-#### Use "Brief" Mode for Simple Lists
-
-In cases where you need to retrieve only a minimal representation of objects, append `?brief=True` to the URL. This instructs NetBox to omit all fields except the following:
-
-* ID
-* URL
-* Display text
-* Name (or similar identifier)
-* Slug (if present)
-* Description
-* Counts of notable related objects (where applicable)
-
-For example, a site fetched using brief mode returns only the following:
-
-```json
-{
-    "id": 2,
-    "url": "https://netbox/api/dcim/sites/2/",
-    "display": "DM-Akron",
-    "name": "DM-Akron",
-    "slug": "dm-akron",
-    "description": ""
-}
-```
-
-Omitting all other fields (especially those which fetch and return related objects) often results in much faster queries.
-
-#### Declare Selected Fields
-
-If you need more flexibility regarding the fields to be returned for an object type, you can specify a list of fields to include using the `fields` query parameter. For example, a request for `/api/dcim/sites/?fields=id,name,status,region` will return the following:
-
-```json
-{
-    "id": 2,
-    "name": "DM-Akron",
-    "status": {
-        "value": "active",
-        "label": "Active"
-    },
-    "region": {
-        "id": 51,
-        "url": "https://netbox/api/dcim/regions/51/",
-        "display": "Ohio",
-        "name": "Ohio",
-        "slug": "us-oh",
-        "description": "",
-        "site_count": 0,
-        "_depth": 2
-    }
-}
-```
-
-Like brief mode, this approach can significantly reduce the response time of an API request by omitting unneeded data.
-
-#### Employ Pagination
-
-Like the user interface, the REST API employs pagination to limit the number of objects returned in a single response. If a page size is not specified by the request (i.e. by passing `?limit=10`), NetBox will use the default size defined by [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](../configuration/default-values.md#paginate_count). The default page size is 50.
-
-For some requests, especially those using brief mode or a minimal selection of fields, it may be desirable to specify a higher page size, so that fewer requests are needed to retrieve all objects. Appending `?limit=0` to the request effectively seeks to disable pagination. (Note, however, that the requested page size cannot exceed the value of [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#max_page_size), which defaults to 1,000.)
-
-Complex API requests, which pull in many related objects, generate a relatively high load on the application, and generally benefit from reduced page size. If you find that your API requests are taking an inordinate amount of time, try reducing the page size from the default value so that fewer objects need to be returned for each request.
-
-### GraphQL API
-
-NetBox's read-only [GraphQL API](../integrations/graphql-api.md) offers an alternative to its REST API, and provides a very flexible means of retrieving data. GraphQL enables the client to request any object from a single endpoint, specifying only the desired attributes and relations. Many users prefer this to the more rigid structure of the REST API, but it's important to understand the trade-offs of crafting complex queries.
-
-#### Request Only the Necessary Fields
-
-For optimal performance, craft your GraphQL queries to return only the fields needed by the client. This will reduce the overall query time, especially when omitting related objects.
-
-#### Avoid Overly Complex Queries
-
-The primary benefit of the GraphQL API is that it allows the client to offload to the server the work of stitching together various related objects, which would require the client to make multiple requests to different endpoints if using the REST API. However, this advantage does not come for free: The more information that is requested in a single query, the more work the server needs to do to fetch the raw data from the database and render it into a GraphQL response. Very complex queries can yield dozens or hundreds of SQL queries on the backend, which increase the time it takes to render a response.
-
-While it can be tempting to pack as much data as possible into a single GraphQL query, realize that there is a balance to be struck between minimizing the number of queries needed and avoiding complexity in the interest of performance. For example, while it is possible to retrieve via a single GraphQL API request all the IP addresses and all attached cables for every device in a site, it is probably more efficient (often _much_ more efficient) to make two or three separate requests and correlate the data locally.
-
-#### Use Filters
-
-You can specify filters when making a GraphQL query to limit the set of objects returned. This works a bit differently from the REST API, as filters are declared inside the query statement rather than appended to the URL, but the concept is the same. For example, to return only active sites:
-
-```graphql
-query {
-  site_list(
-    filters: {
-      status: STATUS_ACTIVE
-    }
-  ) {
-    name
-  }
-}
-```
-
-This returns only sites with a status of "active" and avoid needing to parse through all the others. For further information about filters, see the [GraphQL API documentation](../integrations/graphql-api.md).
-
-#### Employ Pagination
-
-Like the REST API, the GraphQL API supports pagination. Queries which return a large number of objects should employ pagination to limit the size of each response.
-
-```graphql
-{
-  device_list(
-    pagination: {limit: 100}
-  ) {
-    id
-    name
-    serial
-    status
-  }
-}
-```

docs/configuration/data-validation.md

@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-# Data & Validation Parameters
-
-## CUSTOM_VALIDATORS
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-This is a mapping of models to [custom validators](../customization/custom-validation.md) that have been defined locally to enforce custom validation logic. An example is provided below:
-
-```python
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    "dcim.site": [
-        {
-            "name": {
-                "min_length": 5,
-                "max_length": 30
-            }
-        },
-        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1"
-    ],
-    "dcim.device": [
-        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1"
-    ]
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## FIELD_CHOICES
-
-Some static choice fields on models can be configured with custom values. This is done by defining `FIELD_CHOICES` as a dictionary mapping model fields to their choices. Each choice in the list must have a database value and a human-friendly label, and may optionally specify a color. (A list of available colors is provided below.)
-
-The choices provided can either replace the stock choices provided by NetBox, or append to them. To _replace_ the available choices, specify the app, model, and field name separated by dots. For example, the site model would be referenced as `dcim.Site.status`. To _extend_ the available choices, append a plus sign to the end of this string (e.g. `dcim.Site.status+`).
-
-For example, the following configuration would replace the default site status choices with the options Foo, Bar, and Baz:
-
-```python
-FIELD_CHOICES = {
-    'dcim.Site.status': (
-        ('foo', 'Foo', 'red'),
-        ('bar', 'Bar', 'green'),
-        ('baz', 'Baz', 'blue'),
-    )
-}
-```
-
-Appending a plus sign to the field identifier would instead _add_ these choices to the ones already offered:
-
-```python
-FIELD_CHOICES = {
-    'dcim.Site.status+': (
-        ...
-    )
-}
-```
-
-The following model fields support configurable choices:
-
-* `circuits.Circuit.status`
-* `dcim.Device.status`
-* `dcim.Location.status`
-* `dcim.Module.status`
-* `dcim.PowerFeed.status`
-* `dcim.Rack.status`
-* `dcim.Site.status`
-* `dcim.VirtualDeviceContext.status`
-* `extras.JournalEntry.kind`
-* `ipam.IPAddress.status`
-* `ipam.IPRange.status`
-* `ipam.Prefix.status`
-* `ipam.VLAN.status`
-* `virtualization.Cluster.status`
-* `virtualization.VirtualMachine.status`
-* `wireless.WirelessLAN.status`
-
-The following colors are supported:
-
-* `blue`
-* `indigo`
-* `purple`
-* `pink`
-* `red`
-* `orange`
-* `yellow`
-* `green`
-* `teal`
-* `cyan`
-* `gray`
-* `black`
-* `white`
-
----
-
-## PROTECTION_RULES
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-This is a mapping of models to [custom validators](../customization/custom-validation.md) against which an object is evaluated immediately prior to its deletion. If validation fails, the object is not deleted. An example is provided below:
-
-```python
-PROTECTION_RULES = {
-    "dcim.site": [
-        {
-            "status": {
-                "eq": "decommissioning"
-            }
-        },
-        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1",
-    ]
-}
-```

docs/configuration/default-values.md

@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-# Default Value Parameters
-
-## DEFAULT_DASHBOARD
-
-This parameter controls the content and layout of user's default dashboard. Once the dashboard has been created, the user is free to customize it as they please by adding, removing, and reconfiguring widgets.
-
-This parameter must specify an iterable of dictionaries, each representing a discrete dashboard widget and its configuration. The following widget attributes are supported:
-
-* `widget`: Dotted path to the Python class (required)
-* `width`: Default widget width (between 1 and 12, inclusive)
-* `height`: Default widget height, in rows
-* `title`: Widget title
-* `color`: Color of the widget's title bar, specified by name
-* `config`: Dictionary mapping of any widget configuration parameters
-
-A brief example configuration is provided below.
-
-```python
-DEFAULT_DASHBOARD = [
-    {
-        'widget': 'extras.ObjectCountsWidget',
-        'width': 4,
-        'height': 3,
-        'title': 'Organization',
-        'config': {
-            'models': [
-                'dcim.site',
-                'tenancy.tenant',
-                'tenancy.contact',
-            ]
-        }
-    },
-    {
-        'widget': 'extras.ObjectCountsWidget',
-        'width': 4,
-        'height': 3,
-        'title': 'IPAM',
-        'color': 'blue',
-        'config': {
-            'models': [
-                'ipam.prefix',
-                'ipam.iprange',
-                'ipam.ipaddress',
-            ]
-        }
-    },
-]
-```
-
-## DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-This is a dictionary defining the default preferences to be set for newly-created user accounts. For example, to set the default page size for all users to 100, define the following:
-
-```python
-DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES = {
-    "pagination": {
-        "per_page": 100
-    }
-}
-```
-
-For a complete list of available preferences, log into NetBox and navigate to `/user/preferences/`. A period in a preference name indicates a level of nesting in the JSON data. The example above maps to `pagination.per_page`.
-
-See also: [Clearing table preferences](../features/user-preferences.md#clearing-table-preferences) for resolving errors caused by saved table columns or ordering.
-
----
-
-## PAGINATE_COUNT
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `50`
-
-The default maximum number of objects to display per page within each list of objects.
-
----
-
-## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_AMPERAGE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `15`
-
-The default value for the `amperage` field when creating new power feeds.
-
----
-
-## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_MAX_UTILIZATION
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `80`
-
-The default value (percentage) for the `max_utilization` field when creating new power feeds.
-
----
-
-## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_VOLTAGE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `120`
-
-The default value for the `voltage` field when creating new power feeds.
-
----
-
-## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_HEIGHT
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `22`
-
-Default height (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation. For best results, this should be approximately one tenth of `RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH`.
-
----
-
-## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `220`
-
-Default width (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation.

docs/configuration/development.md

@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-# Development Parameters
-
-## DEBUG
-
-Default: `False`
-
-This setting enables debugging. Debugging should be enabled only during development or troubleshooting. Note that only
-clients which access NetBox from a recognized [internal IP address](./system.md#internal_ips) will see debugging tools in the user
-interface.
-
-!!! warning
-    Never enable debugging on a production system, as it can expose sensitive data to unauthenticated users and impose a
-    substantial performance penalty.
-
----
-
-## DEVELOPER
-
-Default: `False`
-
-This parameter serves as a safeguard to prevent some potentially dangerous behavior, such as generating new database schema migrations. Additionally, enabling this setting disables the debug warning banner in the UI. Set this to `True` **only** if you are actively developing the NetBox code base.

docs/configuration/error-reporting.md

@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-# Error Reporting Settings
-
-## SENTRY_CONFIG
-
-A dictionary mapping keyword arguments to values, to be passed to `sentry_sdk.init()`. See the [Sentry Python SDK documentation](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/python/) for more information on supported parameters.
-
-The default configuration is shown below:
-
-```python
-{
-    "sample_rate": 1.0,
-    "send_default_pii": False,
-    "traces_sample_rate": 0,
-}
-```
-
-Additionally, `http_proxy` and `https_proxy` are set to the HTTP and HTTPS proxies, respectively, configured for NetBox (if any).
-
-## SENTRY_DSN
-
-!!! warning "This parameter will be removed in NetBox v4.5."
-    Set this using `SENTRY_CONFIG` instead:
-
-    ```
-    SENTRY_CONFIG = {
-        "dsn": "https://examplePublicKey@o0.ingest.sentry.io/0",
-    }
-    ```
-
-Default: `None`
-
-Defines a Sentry data source name (DSN) for automated error reporting. `SENTRY_ENABLED` must be `True` for this parameter to take effect. For example:
-
-```
-SENTRY_DSN = "https://examplePublicKey@o0.ingest.sentry.io/0"
-```
-
----
-
-## SENTRY_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Set to `True` to enable automatic error reporting via [Sentry](https://sentry.io/).
-
-!!! note
-    The `sentry-sdk` Python package is required to enable Sentry integration.
-
----
-
-## SENTRY_SAMPLE_RATE
-
-!!! warning "This parameter will be removed in NetBox v4.5."
-    Set this using `SENTRY_CONFIG` instead:
-
-    ```
-    SENTRY_CONFIG = {
-        "sample_rate": 0.2,
-    }
-    ```
-
-Default: `1.0` (all)
-
-The sampling rate for errors. Must be a value between 0 (disabled) and 1.0 (report on all errors).
-
----
-
-## SENTRY_SEND_DEFAULT_PII
-
-!!! warning "This parameter will be removed in NetBox v4.5."
-    Set this using `SENTRY_CONFIG` instead:
-
-    ```
-    SENTRY_CONFIG = {
-        "send_default_pii": True,
-    }
-    ```
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Maps to the Sentry SDK's [`send_default_pii`](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/python/configuration/options/#send-default-pii) parameter. If enabled, certain personally identifiable information (PII) is added.
-
-!!! warning "Sensitive data"
-    If you enable this option, be aware that sensitive data such as cookies and authentication tokens will be logged.
-
----
-
-## SENTRY_TAGS
-
-An optional dictionary of tag names and values to apply to Sentry error reports.For example:
-
-```
-SENTRY_TAGS = {
-    "custom.foo": "123",
-    "custom.bar": "abc",
-}
-```
-
-!!! warning "Reserved tag prefixes"
-    Avoid using any tag names which begin with `netbox.`, as this prefix is reserved by the NetBox application.
-
----
-
-## SENTRY_TRACES_SAMPLE_RATE
-
-!!! warning "This parameter will be removed in NetBox v4.5."
-    Set this using `SENTRY_CONFIG` instead:
-
-    ```
-    SENTRY_CONFIG = {
-        "traces_sample_rate": 0.2,
-    }
-    ```
-
-Default: `0` (disabled)
-
-The sampling rate for transactions. Must be a value between 0 (disabled) and 1.0 (report on all transactions).
-
-!!! warning "Consider performance implications"
-    A high sampling rate for transactions can induce significant performance penalties. If transaction reporting is desired, it is recommended to use a relatively low sample rate of 10% to 20% (0.1 to 0.2).

docs/configuration/graphql-api.md

@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-# GraphQL API Parameters
-
-## GRAPHQL_ENABLED
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `True`
-
-Setting this to `False` will disable the GraphQL API.
-
----
-
-## GRAPHQL_MAX_ALIASES
-
-Default: `10`
-
-The maximum number of queries that a GraphQL API request may contain.

docs/configuration/index.md

@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-# NetBox Configuration
-
-## Configuration File
-
-NetBox's configuration file contains all the important parameters which control how NetBox functions: database settings, security controls, user preferences, and so on. While the default configuration suffices out of the box for most use cases, there are a few [required parameters](./required-parameters.md) which **must** be defined during installation. 
-
-The configuration file is loaded from `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/netbox/configuration.py` by default. An example configuration is provided at `configuration_example.py`, which you may copy to use as your default config. Note that a configuration file must be defined; NetBox will not run without one.
-
-!!! info "Customizing the Configuration Module"
-    A custom configuration module may be specified by setting the `NETBOX_CONFIGURATION` environment variable. This must be a dotted path to the desired Python module. For example, a file named `my_config.py` in the same directory as `settings.py` would be referenced as `netbox.my_config`.
-
-    To keep things simple, the NetBox documentation refers to the configuration file simply as `configuration.py`.
-
-Some configuration parameters may alternatively be defined either in `configuration.py` or within the administrative section of the user interface. Settings which are "hard-coded" in the configuration file take precedence over those defined via the UI.
-
-## Dynamic Configuration Parameters
-
-Some configuration parameters are primarily controlled via NetBox's admin interface (under Admin > Extras > Configuration Revisions). These are noted where applicable in the documentation. These settings may also be overridden in `configuration.py` to prevent them from being modified via the UI. A complete list of supported parameters is provided below:
-
-* [`ALLOWED_URL_SCHEMES`](./security.md#allowed_url_schemes)
-* [`BANNER_BOTTOM`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_bottom)
-* [`BANNER_LOGIN`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_login)
-* [`BANNER_TOP`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_top)
-* [`CHANGELOG_RETENTION`](./miscellaneous.md#changelog_retention)
-* [`CUSTOM_VALIDATORS`](./data-validation.md#custom_validators)
-* [`DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES`](./default-values.md#default_user_preferences)
-* [`ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE`](./miscellaneous.md#enforce_global_unique)
-* [`GRAPHQL_ENABLED`](./graphql-api.md#graphql_enabled)
-* [`JOB_RETENTION`](./miscellaneous.md#job_retention)
-* [`MAINTENANCE_MODE`](./miscellaneous.md#maintenance_mode)
-* [`MAPS_URL`](./miscellaneous.md#maps_url)
-* [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](./miscellaneous.md#max_page_size)
-* [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](./default-values.md#paginate_count)
-* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_AMPERAGE`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_amperage)
-* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_MAX_UTILIZATION`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_max_utilization)
-* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_VOLTAGE`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_voltage)
-* [`PREFER_IPV4`](./miscellaneous.md#prefer_ipv4)
-* [`PROTECTION_RULES`](./data-validation.md#protection_rules)
-* [`RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_HEIGHT`](./default-values.md#rack_elevation_default_unit_height)
-* [`RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH`](./default-values.md#rack_elevation_default_unit_width)
-
-## Modifying the Configuration
-
-The configuration file may be modified at any time. However, the WSGI service (e.g. Gunicorn) must be restarted before these changes will take effect:
-
-```no-highlight
-$ sudo systemctl restart netbox
-```
-
-Dynamic configuration parameters (those which can be modified via the UI) take effect immediately.

docs/configuration/mandatory-settings.md

@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+NetBox's local configuration is held in `netbox/netbox/configuration.py`. An example configuration is provided at `netbox/netbox/configuration.example.py`. You may copy or rename the example configuration and make changes as appropriate. NetBox will not run without a configuration file.
+
+## ALLOWED_HOSTS
+
+This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) that is used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different (e.g. when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server). NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs). The value of this option is also used to set `CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`, which restricts `HTTP POST` to the same set of hosts (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/settings/#std:setting-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS)). Keep in mind that NetBox, by default, has `USE_X_FORWARDED_HOST = True` (in `netbox/netbox/settings.py`) which means that if you're using a reverse proxy, it's the FQDN used to reach that reverse proxy which needs to be in this list (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/settings/#allowed-hosts)).
+
+Example:
+
+```
+ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['netbox.example.com', '192.0.2.123']
+```
+
+---
+
+## DATABASE
+
+NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL database service to store data. This service can run locally or on a remote system. The following parameters must be defined within the `DATABASE` dictionary:
+
+* NAME - Database name
+* USER - PostgreSQL username
+* PASSWORD - PostgreSQL password
+* HOST - Name or IP address of the database server (use `localhost` if running locally)
+* PORT - TCP port of the PostgreSQL service; leave blank for default port (5432)
+
+Example:
+
+```
+DATABASE = {
+    'NAME': 'netbox',               # Database name
+    'USER': 'netbox',               # PostgreSQL username
+    'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
+    'HOST': 'localhost',            # Database server
+    'PORT': '',                     # Database port (leave blank for default)
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## SECRET_KEY
+
+This is a secret cryptographic key is used to improve the security of cookies and password resets. The key defined here should not be shared outside of the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing sessions.
+
+Please note that this key is **not** used for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.
+
+`SECRET_KEY` should be at least 50 characters in length and contain a random mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key.

docs/configuration/miscellaneous.md

@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
-# Miscellaneous Parameters
-
-## ADMINS
-
-NetBox will email details about critical errors to the administrators listed here. This should be a list of (name, email) tuples. For example:
-
-```python
-ADMINS = [
-    ['Hank Hill', 'hhill@example.com'],
-    ['Dale Gribble', 'dgribble@example.com'],
-]
-```
-
----
-
-## BANNER_BOTTOM
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Sets content for the bottom banner in the user interface.
-
----
-
-## BANNER_LOGIN
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-This defines custom content to be displayed on the login page above the login form. HTML is allowed.
-
----
-
-## BANNER_MAINTENANCE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-This adds a banner to the top of every page when maintenance mode is enabled. HTML is allowed.
-
----
-
-## BANNER_TOP
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Sets content for the top banner in the user interface.
-
-!!! tip
-    If you'd like the top and bottom banners to match, set the following:
-    
-    ```python
-    BANNER_TOP = 'Your banner text'
-    BANNER_BOTTOM = BANNER_TOP
-    ```
-
----
-
-## COPILOT_ENABLED
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `True`
-
-Enables or disables the [NetBox Copilot](https://netboxlabs.com/docs/copilot/) agent globally. When enabled, users can opt to toggle the agent individually.
-
----
-
-## CENSUS_REPORTING_ENABLED
-
-Default: `True`
-
-Enables anonymous census reporting. To opt out of census reporting, set this to `False`.
-
-This data enables the project maintainers to estimate how many NetBox deployments exist and track the adoption of new versions over time. Census reporting effects a single HTTP request each time a worker starts. The only data reported by this function are the NetBox version, Python version, and a pseudorandom unique identifier.
-
----
-
-## CHANGELOG_RETENTION
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `90`
-
-The number of days to retain logged changes (object creations, updates, and deletions). Set this to `0` to retain
-changes in the database indefinitely.
-
-!!! warning
-    If enabling indefinite changelog retention, it is recommended to periodically delete old entries. Otherwise, the database may eventually exceed capacity.
-
----
-
-## CHANGELOG_SKIP_EMPTY_CHANGES
-
-Default: `True`
-
-If enabled, a change log record will not be created when an object is updated without any changes to its existing field values.
-
-!!! note
-    The object's `last_updated` field will always reflect the time of the most recent update, regardless of this parameter.
-
----
-
-## DATA_UPLOAD_MAX_MEMORY_SIZE
-
-Default: `2621440` (2.5 MB)
-
-The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming HTTP request (i.e. `GET` or `POST` data). Requests which exceed this size will raise a `RequestDataTooBig` exception.
-
----
-
-## ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `True`
-
-By default, NetBox will prevent the creation of duplicate prefixes and IP addresses in the global table (that is, those which are not assigned to any VRF). This validation can be disabled by setting `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` to `False`.
-
----
-
-## EVENTS_PIPELINE
-
-Default: `['extras.events.process_event_queue',]`
-
-NetBox will call dotted paths to the functions listed here for events (create, update, delete) on models as well as when custom EventRules are fired.
-
----
-
-## FILE_UPLOAD_MAX_MEMORY_SIZE
-
-Default: `2621440` (2.5 MB)
-
-The maximum amount (in bytes) of uploaded data that will be held in memory before being written to the filesystem. Changing this setting can be useful for example to be able to upload files bigger than 2.5MB to custom scripts for processing.
-
----
-
-## JOB_RETENTION
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `90`
-
-The number of days to retain job results (scripts and reports). Set this to `0` to retain job results in the database indefinitely.
-
-!!! warning
-    If enabling indefinite job results retention, it is recommended to periodically delete old entries. Otherwise, the database may eventually exceed capacity.
-
----
-
-## MAINTENANCE_MODE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Setting this to `True` will display a "maintenance mode" banner at the top of every page. Additionally, NetBox will no longer update a user's "last active" time upon login. This is to allow new logins when the database is in a read-only state. Recording of login times will resume when maintenance mode is disabled.
-
----
-
-## MAPS_URL
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `https://maps.google.com/?q=` (Google Maps)
-
-This specifies the URL to use when presenting a map of a physical location by street address or GPS coordinates. The URL must accept either a free-form street address or a comma-separated pair of numeric coordinates appended to it. Set this to `None` to disable the "map it" button within the UI.
-
----
-
-## MAX_PAGE_SIZE
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `1000`
-
-A web user or API consumer can request an arbitrary number of objects by appending the "limit" parameter to the URL (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This parameter defines the maximum acceptable limit. Setting this to `0` or `None` will allow a client to retrieve _all_ matching objects at once with no limit by specifying `?limit=0`.
-
----
-
-## METRICS_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Toggle the availability Prometheus-compatible metrics at `/metrics`. See the [Prometheus Metrics](../integrations/prometheus-metrics.md) documentation for more details.
-
----
-
-## PREFER_IPV4
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `False`
-
-When determining the primary IP address for a device, IPv6 is preferred over IPv4 by default. Set this to `True` to prefer IPv4 instead.
-
----
-
-## QUEUE_MAPPINGS
-
-Allows changing which queues are used internally for background tasks.
-
-```python
-QUEUE_MAPPINGS = {
-    'webhook': 'low',
-    'report': 'high',
-    'script': 'high',
-}
-```
-
-If no queue is defined the queue named `default` will be used.
-
----
-
-## RELEASE_CHECK_URL
-
-Default: `None` (disabled)
-
-This parameter defines the URL of the repository that will be checked for new NetBox releases. When a new release is detected, a message will be displayed to administrative users on the home page. This can be set to the official repository (`'https://api.github.com/repos/netbox-community/netbox/releases'`) or a custom fork. Set this to `None` to disable automatic update checks.
-
-!!! note
-    The URL provided **must** be compatible with the [GitHub REST API](https://docs.github.com/en/rest).
-
----
-
-## RQ_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT
-
-Default: `300`
-
-The maximum execution time of a background task (such as running a custom script), in seconds.
-
----
-
-## RQ_RETRY_INTERVAL
-
-Default: `60`
-
-This parameter controls how frequently a failed job is retried, up to the maximum number of times specified by `RQ_RETRY_MAX`. This must be either an integer specifying the number of seconds to wait between successive attempts, or a list of such values. For example, `[60, 300, 3600]` will retry the task after 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 1 hour.
-
----
-
-## RQ_RETRY_MAX
-
-Default: `0` (retries disabled)
-
-The maximum number of times a background task will be retried before being marked as failed.
-
-## DISK_BASE_UNIT
-
-Default: `1000`
-
-The base unit for disk sizes. Set this to `1024` to use binary prefixes (MiB, GiB, etc.) instead of decimal prefixes (MB, GB, etc.).
-
-## RAM_BASE_UNIT
-
-Default: `1000`
-
-The base unit for RAM sizes. Set this to `1024` to use binary prefixes (MiB, GiB, etc.) instead of decimal prefixes (MB, GB, etc.).

docs/configuration/optional-settings.md

@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+The following are optional settings which may be declared in `netbox/netbox/configuration.py`.
+
+## ADMINS
+
+NetBox will email details about critical errors to the administrators listed here. This should be a list of (name, email) tuples. For example:
+
+```
+ADMINS = [
+    ['Hank Hill', 'hhill@example.com'],
+    ['Dale Gribble', 'dgribble@example.com'],
+]
+```
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_TOP
+
+## BANNER_BOTTOM
+
+Setting these variables will display content in a banner at the top and/or bottom of the page, respectively. HTML is allowed. To replicate the content of the top banner in the bottom banner, set:
+
+```
+BANNER_TOP = 'Your banner text'
+BANNER_BOTTOM = BANNER_TOP
+```
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_LOGIN
+
+The value of this variable will be displayed on the login page above the login form. HTML is allowed.
+
+---
+
+## BASE_PATH
+
+Default: None
+
+The base URL path to use when accessing NetBox. Do not include the scheme or domain name. For example, if installed at http://example.com/netbox/, set:
+
+```
+BASE_PATH = 'netbox/'
+```
+
+---
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL
+
+Default: False
+
+If True, cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) requests will be accepted from all origins. If False, a whitelist will be used (see below).
+
+---
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST
+
+These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use `CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is True.)
+
+---
+
+## DEBUG
+
+Default: False
+
+This setting enables debugging. This should be done only during development or troubleshooting. Never enable debugging on a production system, as it can expose sensitive data to unauthenticated users.
+
+---
+
+## EMAIL
+
+In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following items can be defined within the `EMAIL` setting:
+
+* SERVER - Host name or IP address of the email server (use `localhost` if running locally)
+* PORT - TCP port to use for the connection (default: 25)
+* USERNAME - Username with which to authenticate
+* PASSSWORD - Password with which to authenticate
+* TIMEOUT - Amount of time to wait for a connection (seconds)
+* FROM_EMAIL - Sender address for emails sent by NetBox
+
+---
+
+# ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
+
+Default: False
+
+Enforcement of unique IP space can be toggled on a per-VRF basis. To enforce unique IP space within the global table (all prefixes and IP addresses not assigned to a VRF), set `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` to True.
+
+---
+
+## LOGGING
+
+By default, all messages of INFO severity or higher will be logged to the console. Additionally, if `DEBUG` is False and email access has been configured, ERROR and CRITICAL messages will be emailed to the users defined in `ADMINS`.
+
+The Django framework on which NetBox runs allows for the customization of logging, e.g. to write logs to file. Please consult the [Django logging documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.11/topics/logging/) for more information on configuring this setting. Below is an example which will write all INFO and higher messages to a file:
+
+```
+LOGGING = {
+    'version': 1,
+    'disable_existing_loggers': False,
+    'handlers': {
+        'file': {
+            'level': 'INFO',
+            'class': 'logging.FileHandler',
+            'filename': '/var/log/netbox.log',
+        },
+    },
+    'loggers': {
+        'django': {
+            'handlers': ['file'],
+            'level': 'INFO',
+        },
+    },
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## LOGIN_REQUIRED
+
+Default: False
+
+Setting this to True will permit only authenticated users to access any part of NetBox. By default, anonymous users are permitted to access most data in NetBox (excluding secrets) but not make any changes.
+
+---
+
+## MAINTENANCE_MODE
+
+Default: False
+
+Setting this to True will display a "maintenance mode" banner at the top of every page.
+
+---
+
+## MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+
+Default: 1000
+
+An API consumer can request an arbitrary number of objects by appending the "limit" parameter to the URL (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This setting defines the maximum limit. Setting it to `0` or `None` will allow an API consumer to request all objects by specifying `?limit=0`.
+
+---
+
+## MEDIA_ROOT
+
+Default: $BASE_DIR/netbox/media/
+
+The file path to the location where media files (such as image attachments) are stored. By default, this is the `netbox/media/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_USERNAME
+
+## NAPALM_PASSWORD
+
+NetBox will use these credentials when authenticating to remote devices via the [NAPALM library](https://napalm-automation.net/), if installed. Both parameters are optional.
+
+Note: If SSH public key authentication has been set up for the system account under which NetBox runs, these parameters are not needed.
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_ARGS
+
+A dictionary of optional arguments to pass to NAPALM when instantiating a network driver. See the NAPALM documentation for a [complete list of optional arguments](http://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/#optional-arguments). An example:
+
+```
+NAPALM_ARGS = {
+    'api_key': '472071a93b60a1bd1fafb401d9f8ef41',
+    'port': 2222,
+}
+```
+
+Note: Some platforms (e.g. Cisco IOS) require an argument named `secret` to be passed in addition to the normal password. If desired, you can use the configured `NAPALM_PASSWORD` as the value for this argument:
+
+```
+NAPALM_USERNAME = 'username'
+NAPALM_PASSWORD = 'MySecretPassword'
+NAPALM_ARGS = {
+    'secret': NAPALM_PASSWORD,
+    # Include any additional args here
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: 30 seconds
+
+The amount of time (in seconds) to wait for NAPALM to connect to a device.
+
+---
+
+## PAGINATE_COUNT
+
+Default: 50
+
+Determine how many objects to display per page within each list of objects.
+
+---
+
+## PREFER_IPV4
+
+Default: False
+
+When determining the primary IP address for a device, IPv6 is preferred over IPv4 by default. Set this to True to prefer IPv4 instead.
+
+---
+
+## REPORTS_ROOT
+
+Default: $BASE_DIR/netbox/reports/
+
+The file path to the location where custom reports will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/reports/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## TIME_ZONE
+
+Default: UTC
+
+The time zone NetBox will use when dealing with dates and times. It is recommended to use UTC time unless you have a specific need to use a local time zone. [List of available time zones](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones).
+
+---
+
+## Date and Time Formatting
+
+You may define custom formatting for date and times. For detailed instructions on writing format strings, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/dev/ref/templates/builtins/#date).
+
+Defaults:
+
+```
+DATE_FORMAT = 'N j, Y'               # June 26, 2016
+SHORT_DATE_FORMAT = 'Y-m-d'          # 2016-06-27
+TIME_FORMAT = 'g:i a'                # 1:23 p.m.
+SHORT_TIME_FORMAT = 'H:i:s'          # 13:23:00
+DATETIME_FORMAT = 'N j, Y g:i a'     # June 26, 2016 1:23 p.m.
+SHORT_DATETIME_FORMAT = 'Y-m-d H:i'  # 2016-06-27 13:23
+```

docs/configuration/plugins.md

@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-# Plugin Parameters
-
-## PLUGINS
-
-Default: `[]`
-
-A list of installed [NetBox plugins](../plugins/index.md) to enable. Plugins will not take effect unless they are listed here.
-
-!!! warning
-    Plugins extend NetBox by allowing external code to run with the same access and privileges as NetBox itself. Only install plugins from trusted sources. The NetBox maintainers make absolutely no guarantees about the integrity or security of your installation with plugins enabled.
-
----
-
-## PLUGINS_CONFIG
-
-Default: `[]`
-
-This parameter holds configuration settings for individual NetBox plugins. It is defined as a dictionary, with each key using the name of an installed plugin. The specific parameters supported are unique to each plugin: Reference the plugin's documentation to determine the supported parameters. An example configuration is shown below:
-
-```python
-PLUGINS_CONFIG = {
-    'plugin1': {
-        'foo': 123,
-        'bar': True
-    },
-    'plugin2': {
-        'foo': 456,
-    },
-}
-```
-
-Note that a plugin must be listed in `PLUGINS` for its configuration to take effect.
-
----
-
-## PLUGINS_CATALOG_CONFIG
-
-Default: `{}` (Empty)
-
-This parameter controls how individual plugins are displayed in the plugins catalog under Admin > System > Plugins. Adding a plugin to the `hidden` list will omit that plugin from the catalog. Adding a plugin to the `static` list will display the plugin, but not link to the plugin details or upgrade instructions.
-
-An example configuration is shown below:
-
-```python
-PLUGINS_CATALOG_CONFIG = {
-    'hidden': [
-        'plugin1',
-    ],
-    'static': [
-        'plugin2',
-    ],
-}
-```

docs/configuration/remote-authentication.md

@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-# Remote Authentication Settings
-
-The configuration parameters listed here control remote authentication for NetBox. Note that `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` must be `True` in order for these settings to take effect.
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_AUTO_CREATE_GROUPS
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, NetBox will automatically create groups specified in the `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER` header if they don't already exist. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_AUTO_CREATE_USER
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, NetBox will automatically create local accounts for users authenticated via a remote service. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND
-
-Default: `'netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend'`
-
-This is the Python path to the custom [Django authentication backend](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/customizing/) to use for external user authentication. NetBox provides two built-in backends (listed below), though custom authentication backends may also be provided by other packages or plugins. Provide a string for a single backend, or an iterable for multiple backends, which will be attempted in the order given.
-
-* `netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend`
-* `netbox.authentication.LDAPBackend`
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS
-
-Default: `{}` (Empty dictionary)
-
-A mapping of permissions to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. Each key in the dictionary should be set to a dictionary of the attributes to be applied to the permission, or `None` to allow all objects. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` as `True` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` as `False`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-NetBox can be configured to support remote user authentication by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.) (`REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_GROUPS` will not function if `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` is disabled)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_GROUP'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Groups` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_GROUPS`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SEPARATOR
-
-Default: `|` (Pipe)
-
-The Separator upon which `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER` gets split into individual Groups. This needs to be coordinated with your authentication Proxy. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-NetBox can be configured to sync remote user groups by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.) (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_HEADER
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
-!!! warning Verify Header Compatibility
-    Some WSGI servers may drop headers which contain unsupported characters. For instance, gunicorn v22.0 and later silently drops HTTP headers containing underscores. This behavior can be disabled by changing gunicorn's [`header_map`](https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map) setting to `dangerous`.
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_EMAIL
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_EMAIL'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the email address of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Email` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_EMAIL`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_FIRST_NAME
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the first name of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-First-Name` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_LAST_NAME
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the last name of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Last-Name` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSER_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups that promote an remote User to Superuser on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSERS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of users that get promoted to Superuser on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups that promote an remote User to Staff on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_USERS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of users that get promoted to Staff on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )

docs/configuration/required-parameters.md

@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
-# Required Configuration Settings
-
-## ALLOWED_HOSTS
-
-This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) and/or IP addresses that can be used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different; for example, when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server. To help guard against [HTTP Host header attacks](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/security/#host-headers-virtual-hosting), NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs).
-
-!!! note
-    This parameter must always be defined as a list or tuple, even if only a single value is provided.
-
-The value of this option is also used to set `CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`, which restricts POST requests to the same set of hosts (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#std:setting-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS)). Keep in mind that NetBox, by default, sets `USE_X_FORWARDED_HOST` to `True`, which means that if you're using a reverse proxy, it's the FQDN used to reach that reverse proxy which needs to be in this list (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#allowed-hosts)).
-
-Example:
-
-```
-ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['netbox.example.com', '192.0.2.123']
-```
-
-If you are not yet sure what the domain name and/or IP address of the NetBox installation will be, and are comfortable accepting the risks in doing so, you can set this to a wildcard (asterisk) to allow all host values:
-
-```
-ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['*']
-```
-
----
-
-## DATABASE
-
-!!! warning "Legacy Configuration Parameter"
-    The `DATABASE` configuration parameter is deprecated and will be removed in a future release. Users are advised to adopt the new `DATABASES` (plural) parameter, which allows for the configuration of multiple databases.
-
-See the [`DATABASES`](#databases) configuration below for usage.
-
----
-
-## DATABASES
-
-NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL 14 or later database service to store data. This service can run locally on the NetBox server or on a remote system. Databases are defined as named dictionaries:
-
-```python
-DATABASES = {
-    'default': {...},
-    'external1': {...},
-    'external2': {...},
-}
-```
-
-NetBox itself requires only that a `default` database is defined. However, certain plugins may require the configuration of additional databases. (Consider also configuring the [`DATABASE_ROUTERS`](./system.md#database_routers) parameter when multiple databases are in use.)
-
-The following parameters must be defined for each database:
-
-* `NAME` - Database name
-* `USER` - PostgreSQL username
-* `PASSWORD` - PostgreSQL password
-* `HOST` - Name or IP address of the database server (use `localhost` if running locally)
-* `PORT` - TCP port of the PostgreSQL service; leave blank for default port (TCP/5432)
-* `CONN_MAX_AGE` - Lifetime of a [persistent database connection](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/databases/#persistent-connections), in seconds (300 is the default)
-* `ENGINE` - The database backend to use; must be a PostgreSQL-compatible backend (e.g. `django.db.backends.postgresql`)
-
-Example:
-
-```python
-DATABASES = {
-    'default': {
-        'ENGINE': 'django.db.backends.postgresql',
-        'NAME': 'netbox',               # Database name
-        'USER': 'netbox',               # PostgreSQL username
-        'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
-        'HOST': 'localhost',            # Database server
-        'PORT': '',                     # Database port (leave blank for default)
-        'CONN_MAX_AGE': 300,            # Max database connection age
-    }
-}
-```
-
-!!! note
-    NetBox supports all PostgreSQL database options supported by the underlying Django framework. For a complete list of available parameters, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#databases).
-
-!!! warning
-    The `ENGINE` parameter must specify a PostgreSQL-compatible database backend. If not defined, the default engine `django.db.backends.postgresql` will be used.
-
----
-
-## REDIS
-
-[Redis](https://redis.io/) is a lightweight in-memory data store similar to memcached. NetBox employs Redis for background task queuing and other features.
-
-Redis is configured using a configuration setting similar to `DATABASE` and these settings are the same for both of the `tasks` and `caching` subsections:
-
-* `HOST` - Name or IP address of the Redis server (use `localhost` if running locally)
-* `PORT` - TCP port of the Redis service; leave blank for default port (6379)
-* `USERNAME` - Redis username (if set)
-* `PASSWORD` - Redis password (if set)
-* `DATABASE` - Numeric database ID
-* `SSL` - Use SSL connection to Redis
-* `INSECURE_SKIP_TLS_VERIFY` - Set to `True` to **disable** TLS certificate verification (not recommended)
-
-An example configuration is provided below:
-
-```python
-REDIS = {
-    'tasks': {
-        'HOST': 'redis.example.com',
-        'PORT': 1234,
-        'USERNAME': 'netbox',
-        'PASSWORD': 'foobar',
-        'DATABASE': 0,
-        'SSL': False,
-    },
-    'caching': {
-        'HOST': 'localhost',
-        'PORT': 6379,
-        'USERNAME': '',
-        'PASSWORD': '',
-        'DATABASE': 1,
-        'SSL': False,
-    }
-}
-```
-
-!!! warning
-    It is highly recommended to keep the task and cache databases separate. Using the same database number on the
-    same Redis instance for both may result in queued background tasks being lost during cache flushing events.
-
-### UNIX Socket Support
-
-Redis may alternatively be configured by specifying a complete URL instead of individual components. This approach supports the use of a UNIX socket connection. For example:
-
-```python
-REDIS = {
-    'tasks': {
-        'URL': 'unix:///run/redis-netbox/redis.sock?db=0'
-    },
-    'caching': {
-        'URL': 'unix:///run/redis-netbox/redis.sock?db=1'
-    },
-}
-```
-
-### Using Redis Sentinel
-
-If you are using [Redis Sentinel](https://redis.io/topics/sentinel) for high-availability purposes, there is minimal 
-configuration necessary to convert NetBox to recognize it. It requires the removal of the `HOST` and `PORT` keys from 
-above and the addition of three new keys.
-
-* `SENTINELS`: List of tuples or tuple of tuples with each inner tuple containing the name or IP address 
-of the Redis server and port for each sentinel instance to connect to
-* `SENTINEL_SERVICE`: Name of the master / service to connect to
-* `SENTINEL_TIMEOUT`: Connection timeout, in seconds
-
-Example:
-
-```python
-REDIS = {
-    'tasks': {
-        'SENTINELS': [('mysentinel.redis.example.com', 6379)],
-        'SENTINEL_SERVICE': 'netbox',
-        'SENTINEL_TIMEOUT': 10,
-        'PASSWORD': '',
-        'DATABASE': 0,
-        'SSL': False,
-    },
-    'caching': {
-        'SENTINELS': [
-            ('mysentinel.redis.example.com', 6379),
-            ('othersentinel.redis.example.com', 6379)
-        ],
-        'SENTINEL_SERVICE': 'netbox',
-        'PASSWORD': '',
-        'DATABASE': 1,
-        'SSL': False,
-    }
-}
-```
-
-!!! note
-    It is permissible to use Sentinel for only one database and not the other.
-
----
-
-## SECRET_KEY
-
-This is a secret, pseudorandom string used to assist in the creation new cryptographic hashes for passwords and HTTP cookies. The key defined here should not be shared outside the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time without impacting stored data, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing user sessions. NetBox deployments comprising multiple nodes must have the same secret key configured on all nodes.
-
-`SECRET_KEY` **must** be at least 50 characters in length, and should contain a mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key. Please note that this key is **not** used directly for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.

docs/configuration/security.md

@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-# Security & Authentication Parameters
-
-## ALLOW_TOKEN_RETRIEVAL
-
-Default: `False`
-
-!!! note
-    The default value of this parameter changed from `True` to `False` in NetBox v4.3.0.
-
-If disabled, the values of API tokens will not be displayed after each token's initial creation. A user **must** record the value of a token prior to its creation, or it will be lost. Note that this affects _all_ users, regardless of assigned permissions.
-
----
-
-## ALLOWED_URL_SCHEMES
-
-!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
-
-Default: `('file', 'ftp', 'ftps', 'http', 'https', 'irc', 'mailto', 'sftp', 'ssh', 'tel', 'telnet', 'tftp', 'vnc', 'xmpp')`
-
-A list of permitted URL schemes referenced when rendering links within NetBox. Note that only the schemes specified in this list will be accepted: If adding your own, be sure to replicate all the default values as well (excluding those schemes which are not desirable).
-
----
-
-## AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS
-
-This parameter acts as a pass-through for configuring Django's built-in password validators for local user accounts. These rules are applied whenever a user's password is created or updated to ensure that it meets minimum criteria such as length or complexity. The default configuration is shown below.
-
-```python
-AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS = [
-    {
-        "NAME": "django.contrib.auth.password_validation.MinimumLengthValidator",
-        "OPTIONS": {
-            "min_length": 12,
-        },
-    },
-    {
-        "NAME": "utilities.password_validation.AlphanumericPasswordValidator",
-    },
-]
-```
-
-The default configuration enforces the follow criteria:
-
-* A password must be at least 12 characters in length.
-* A password must have at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, and one numeric digit.
-
-Although it is not recommended, the default validation rules can be disabled by setting `AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS = []` in the configuration file. For more detail on customizing password validation, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/passwords/#password-validation).
-
----
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) requests will be accepted from all origins. If False, a whitelist will be used (see below).
-
----
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST
-
-These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use
-`CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular 
-expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is `True`.) For example:
-
-```python
-CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST = [
-    'https://example.com',
-]
-```
-
----
-
-## CSRF_COOKIE_NAME
-
-Default: `csrftoken`
-
-The name of the cookie to use for the cross-site request forgery (CSRF) authentication token. See the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#csrf-cookie-name) for more detail.
-
----
-
-## CSRF_COOKIE_SECURE
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, the cookie employed for cross-site request forgery (CSRF) protection will be marked as secure, meaning that it can only be sent across an HTTPS connection.
-
----
-
-## CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS
-
-Default: `[]`
-
-Defines a list of trusted origins for unsafe (e.g. `POST`) requests. This is a pass-through to Django's [`CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#csrf-trusted-origins) setting. Note that each host listed must specify a scheme (e.g. `http://` or `https://`).
-
-```python
-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS = (
-    'http://netbox.local',
-    'https://netbox.local',
-)
-```
-
----
-
-## DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS
-
-Default:
-
-```python
-{
-    'users.view_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
-    'users.add_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
-    'users.change_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
-    'users.delete_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
-}
-```
-
-This parameter defines object permissions that are applied automatically to _any_ authenticated user, regardless of what permissions have been defined in the database. By default, this parameter is defined to allow all users to manage their own API tokens, however it can be overriden for any purpose.
-
-For example, to allow all users to create a device role beginning with the word "temp," you could configure the following:
-
-```python
-DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS = {
-    'dcim.add_devicerole': (
-        {'name__startswith': 'temp'},
-    )
-}
-```
-
-!!! warning
-    Setting a custom value for this parameter will overwrite the default permission mapping shown above. If you want to retain the default mapping, be sure to reproduce it in your custom configuration.
-
----
-
-## EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-A list of NetBox models to exempt from the enforcement of view permissions. Models listed here will be viewable by all users, both authenticated and anonymous.
-
-List models in the form `<app>.<model>`. For example:
-
-```python
-EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = [
-    'dcim.site',
-    'dcim.region',
-    'ipam.prefix',
-]
-```
-
-To exempt _all_ models from view permission enforcement, set the following. (Note that `EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS` must be an iterable.)
-
-```python
-EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = ['*']
-```
-
-!!! note
-    Using a wildcard will not affect certain potentially sensitive models, such as user permissions. If there is a need to exempt these models, they must be specified individually.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_PERSISTENCE
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, the lifetime of a user's authentication session will be automatically reset upon each valid request. For example, if [`LOGIN_TIMEOUT`](#login_timeout) is configured to 14 days (the default), and a user whose session is due to expire in five days makes a NetBox request (with a valid session cookie), the session's lifetime will be reset to 14 days.
-
-Note that enabling this setting causes NetBox to update a user's session in the database (or file, as configured per [`SESSION_FILE_PATH`](#session_file_path)) with each request, which may introduce significant overhead in very active environments. It also permits an active user to remain authenticated to NetBox indefinitely.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_REQUIRED
-
-Default: `True`
-
-When enabled, only authenticated users are permitted to access any part of NetBox. Disabling this will allow unauthenticated users to access most areas of NetBox (but not make any changes).
-
-!!! info "Changed in NetBox v4.0.2"
-    Prior to NetBox v4.0.2, this setting was disabled by default.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_TIMEOUT
-
-Default: `1209600` seconds (14 days)
-
-The lifetime (in seconds) of the authentication cookie issued to a NetBox user upon login.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_FORM_HIDDEN
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Option to hide the login form when only SSO authentication is in use. 
-
-!!! warning
-    If the SSO provider is unreachable, login to NetBox will be impossible if this option is enabled. The only recourse is to disable it in the local configuration and restart the NetBox service.
-
----
-
-## LOGOUT_REDIRECT_URL
-
-Default: `'home'`
-
-The view name or URL to which a user is redirected after logging out.
-
----
-
-## SECURE_HSTS_INCLUDE_SUBDOMAINS
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, the `includeSubDomains` directive will be included in the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header. This directive instructs the browser to apply the HSTS policy to all subdomains of the current domain.
-
----
-
-## SECURE_HSTS_PRELOAD
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, the `preload` directive will be included in the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header. This directive instructs the browser to preload the site in HTTPS. Browsers that use the HSTS preload list will force the site to be accessed via HTTPS even if the user types HTTP in the address bar.
-
----
-
-## SECURE_HSTS_SECONDS
-
-Default: `0`
-
-If set to a non-zero integer value, the SecurityMiddleware sets the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header on all responses that do not already have it. This will instruct the browser that the website must be accessed via HTTPS, blocking any HTTP request.
-
----
-
-## SECURE_SSL_REDIRECT
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, all non-HTTPS requests will be automatically redirected to use HTTPS.
-
-!!! warning
-    Ensure that your frontend HTTP daemon has been configured to forward the HTTP scheme correctly before enabling this option. An incorrectly configured frontend may result in a looping redirect.
-
----
-
-## SESSION_COOKIE_NAME
-
-Default: `sessionid`
-
-The name used for the session cookie. See the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#session-cookie-name) for more detail.
-
----
-
-## SESSION_COOKIE_SECURE
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If `True`, the cookie employed for session authentication will be marked as secure, meaning that it can only be sent across an HTTPS connection.
-
----
-
-## SESSION_FILE_PATH
-
-Default: `None`
-
-HTTP session data is used to track authenticated users when they access NetBox. By default, NetBox stores session data in its PostgreSQL database. However, this inhibits authentication to a standby instance of NetBox without write access to the database. Alternatively, a local file path may be specified here and NetBox will store session data as files instead of using the database. Note that the NetBox system user must have read and write permissions to this path.

docs/configuration/system.md

@@ -1,318 +0,0 @@
-# System Parameters
-
-## BASE_PATH
-
-Default: `None`
-
-The base URL path to use when accessing NetBox. Do not include the scheme or domain name. For example, if installed at https://example.com/netbox/, set:
-
-```python
-BASE_PATH = 'netbox/'
-```
-
----
-
-## DATABASE_ROUTERS
-
-Default: `[]` (empty list)
-
-An iterable of [database routers](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/db/multi-db/) to use for automatically selecting the appropriate database(s) for a query. This is useful only when [multiple databases](./required-parameters.md#databases) have been configured.
-
----
-
-## DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
-
-Default: `en-us` (US English)
-
-Defines the default preferred language/locale for requests that do not specify one. (This parameter maps to Django's [`LANGUAGE_CODE`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#language-code) internal setting.)
-
----
-
-## DOCS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/docs/`
-
-The filesystem path to NetBox's documentation. This is used when presenting context-sensitive documentation in the web UI. By default, this will be the `docs/` directory within the root NetBox installation path. (Set this to `None` to disable the embedded documentation.)
-
----
-
-## EMAIL
-
-In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following items can be defined within the `EMAIL` configuration parameter:
-
-* `SERVER` - Hostname or IP address of the email server (use `localhost` if running locally)
-* `PORT` - TCP port to use for the connection (default: `25`)
-* `USERNAME` - Username with which to authenticate
-* `PASSWORD` - Password with which to authenticate
-* `USE_SSL` - Use SSL when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
-* `USE_TLS` - Use TLS when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
-* `SSL_CERTFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL certificate file (optional)
-* `SSL_KEYFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL private key file (optional)
-* `TIMEOUT` - Amount of time to wait for a connection, in seconds (default: `10`)
-* `FROM_EMAIL` - Sender address for emails sent by NetBox
-
-!!! note
-    The `USE_SSL` and `USE_TLS` parameters are mutually exclusive.
-
-Email is sent from NetBox only for critical events or if configured for [logging](#logging). If you would like to test the email server configuration, Django provides a convenient [send_mail()](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/email/#send-mail) function accessible within the NetBox shell:
-
-```no-highlight
-# python ./manage.py nbshell
->>> from django.core.mail import send_mail
->>> send_mail(
-  'Test Email Subject',
-  'Test Email Body',
-  'noreply-netbox@example.com',
-  ['users@example.com'],
-  fail_silently=False
-)
-```
-
----
-
-## HOSTNAME
-
-!!! info "This parameter was introduced in NetBox v4.4."
-
-Default: System hostname
-
-The hostname displayed in the user interface identifying the system on which NetBox is running. If not defined, this defaults to the system hostname as reported by Python's `platform.node()`.
-
----
-
-## HTTP_PROXIES
-
-Default: `None`
-
-A dictionary of HTTP proxies to use for outbound requests originating from NetBox (e.g. when sending webhook requests). Proxies should be specified by schema (HTTP and HTTPS) as per the [Python requests library documentation](https://requests.readthedocs.io/en/latest/user/advanced/#proxies). For example:
-
-```python
-HTTP_PROXIES = {
-    'http': 'http://10.10.1.10:3128',
-    'https': 'http://10.10.1.10:1080',
-}
-```
-
-If more flexibility is needed in determining which proxy to use for a given request, consider implementing one or more custom proxy routers via the [`PROXY_ROUTERS`](#proxy_routers) parameter.
-
----
-
-## INTERNAL_IPS
-
-Default: `('127.0.0.1', '::1')`
-
-A list of IP addresses recognized as internal to the system, used to control the display of debugging output. For
-example, the debugging toolbar will be viewable only when a client is accessing NetBox from one of the listed IP
-addresses (and [`DEBUG`](./development.md#debug) is `True`).
-
----
-
-## ISOLATED_DEPLOYMENT
-
-Default: `False`
-
-Set this configuration parameter to `True` for NetBox deployments which do not have Internet access. This will disable miscellaneous functionality which depends on access to the Internet.
-
-!!! note
-    If Internet access is available via a proxy, set [`HTTP_PROXIES`](#http_proxies) instead.
-
----
-
-## JINJA2_FILTERS
-
-Default: `{}`
-
-A dictionary of custom Jinja2 filters with the key being the filter name and the value being a callable. For more information see the [Jinja2 documentation](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.1.x/api/#custom-filters). For example:
-
-```python
-def uppercase(x):
-    return str(x).upper()
-
-JINJA2_FILTERS = {
-    'uppercase': uppercase,
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## LOGGING
-
-By default, all messages of INFO severity or higher will be logged to the console. Additionally, if [`DEBUG`](./development.md#debug) is False and email access has been configured, ERROR and CRITICAL messages will be emailed to the users defined in [`ADMINS`](./miscellaneous.md#admins).
-
-The Django framework on which NetBox runs allows for the customization of logging format and destination. Please consult the [Django logging documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/logging/) for more information on configuring this setting. Below is an example which will write all INFO and higher messages to a local file:
-
-```python
-LOGGING = {
-    'version': 1,
-    'disable_existing_loggers': False,
-    'handlers': {
-        'file': {
-            'level': 'INFO',
-            'class': 'logging.FileHandler',
-            'filename': '/var/log/netbox.log',
-        },
-    },
-    'loggers': {
-        'django': {
-            'handlers': ['file'],
-            'level': 'INFO',
-        },
-    },
-}
-```
-
-### Available Loggers
-
-* `netbox.<app>.<model>` - Generic form for model-specific log messages
-* `netbox.auth.*` - Authentication events
-* `netbox.api.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the REST API
-* `netbox.event_rules` - Event rules
-* `netbox.jobs.*` - Background jobs
-* `netbox.reports.*` - Report execution (`module.name`)
-* `netbox.scripts.*` - Custom script execution (`module.name`)
-* `netbox.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the web UI
-
----
-
-## MEDIA_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/media/`
-
-The file path to the location where media files (such as image attachments) are stored. By default, this is the `netbox/media/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## PROXY_ROUTERS
-
-Default: `["utilities.proxy.DefaultProxyRouter"]`
-
-A list of Python classes responsible for determining which proxy server(s) to use for outbound HTTP requests. Each item in the list can be the class itself or the dotted path to the class.
-
-The `route()` method on each class must return a dictionary of candidate proxies arranged by protocol (e.g. `http` and/or `https`), or None if no viable proxy can be determined. The default class, `DefaultProxyRouter`, simply returns the content of [`HTTP_PROXIES`](#http_proxies).
-
----
-
-## REPORTS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/reports/`
-
-The file path to the location where [custom reports](../customization/reports.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/reports/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## SCRIPTS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/scripts/`
-
-The file path to the location where [custom scripts](../customization/custom-scripts.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/scripts/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## SEARCH_BACKEND
-
-Default: `'netbox.search.backends.CachedValueSearchBackend'`
-
-The dotted path to the desired search backend class. `CachedValueSearchBackend` is currently the only search backend provided in NetBox, however this setting can be used to enable a custom backend. 
-
----
-
-## STORAGES
-
-The backend storage engine for handling uploaded files such as [image attachments](../models/extras/imageattachment.md) and [custom scripts](../customization/custom-scripts.md). NetBox integrates with the [`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) and [`django-storage-swift`](https://github.com/dennisv/django-storage-swift) libraries, which provide backends for several popular file storage services. If not configured, local filesystem storage will be used.
-
-By default, the following configuration is used:
-
-```python
-STORAGES = {
-    "default": {
-        "BACKEND": "django.core.files.storage.FileSystemStorage",
-    },
-    "staticfiles": {
-        "BACKEND": "django.contrib.staticfiles.storage.StaticFilesStorage",
-    },
-    "scripts": {
-        "BACKEND": "extras.storage.ScriptFileSystemStorage",
-        "OPTIONS": {
-            "allow_overwrite": True,
-        },
-    },
-}
-```
-
-Within the `STORAGES` dictionary, `"default"` is used for image uploads, "staticfiles" is for static files and `"scripts"` is used for custom scripts.
-
-If using a remote storage like S3, define the config as `STORAGES[key]["OPTIONS"]` for each storage item as needed. For example:
-
-```python
-STORAGES = { 
-    "scripts": { 
-        "BACKEND": "storages.backends.s3boto3.S3Boto3Storage", 
-        "OPTIONS": { 
-            'access_key': 'access key', 
-            'secret_key': 'secret key',
-            "allow_overwrite": True,
-        }
-    }, 
-}
-```
-
-The specific configuration settings for each storage backend can be found in the [django-storages documentation](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/latest/index.html).
-
-!!! note
-    Any keys defined in the `STORAGES` configuration parameter replace those in the default configuration. It is only necessary to define keys within the `STORAGES` for the specific backend(s) you wish to configure.
-
-### Environment Variables and Third-Party Libraries
-
-NetBox uses an explicit Python configuration approach rather than automatic environment variable detection. While this provides clear configuration management and version control capabilities, it affects how some third-party libraries like `django-storages` function within NetBox's context.
-
-Many Django libraries (including `django-storages`) expect to automatically detect environment variables like `AWS_STORAGE_BUCKET_NAME` or `AWS_S3_ACCESS_KEY_ID`. However, NetBox's configuration processing prevents this automatic detection from working as documented in some of these libraries.
-
-When using third-party libraries that rely on environment variable detection, you may need to explicitly read environment variables in your NetBox `configuration.py`:
-
-```python
-import os
-
-STORAGES = {
-    'default': {
-        'BACKEND': 'storages.backends.s3.S3Storage',
-        'OPTIONS': {
-            'bucket_name': os.environ.get('AWS_STORAGE_BUCKET_NAME'),
-            'access_key': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_ACCESS_KEY_ID'),
-            'secret_key': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY'),
-            'endpoint_url': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_ENDPOINT_URL'),
-            'location': 'media/',
-        }
-    },
-    'staticfiles': {
-        'BACKEND': 'storages.backends.s3.S3Storage',
-        'OPTIONS': {
-            'bucket_name': os.environ.get('AWS_STORAGE_BUCKET_NAME'),
-            'access_key': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_ACCESS_KEY_ID'),
-            'secret_key': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY'),
-            'endpoint_url': os.environ.get('AWS_S3_ENDPOINT_URL'),
-            'location': 'static/',
-        }
-    },
-}
-```
-
-This approach works because the environment variables are resolved during NetBox's configuration processing, before the third-party library attempts its own environment variable detection.
-
-!!! warning "Configuration Behavior"
-    Simply setting environment variables like `AWS_STORAGE_BUCKET_NAME` without explicitly reading them in your configuration will not work. The variables must be read using `os.environ.get()` within your `configuration.py` file.
-
----
-
-## TIME_ZONE
-
-Default: `"UTC"`
-
-The time zone NetBox will use when dealing with dates and times. It is recommended to use UTC time unless you have a specific need to use a local time zone. Please see the [list of available time zones](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones).
-
----
-
-## TRANSLATION_ENABLED
-
-Default: `True`
-
-Enables language translation for the user interface. (This parameter maps to Django's [USE_I18N](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#std-setting-USE_I18N) setting.)

docs/customization/custom-fields.md

@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-# Custom Fields
-
-Each model in NetBox is represented in the database as a discrete table, and each attribute of a model exists as a column within its table. For example, sites are stored in the `dcim_site` table, which has columns named `name`, `facility`, `physical_address`, and so on. As new attributes are added to objects throughout the development of NetBox, tables are expanded to include new rows.
-
-However, some users might want to store additional object attributes that are somewhat esoteric in nature, and that would not make sense to include in the core NetBox database schema. For instance, suppose your organization needs to associate each device with a ticket number correlating it with an internal support system record. This is certainly a legitimate use for NetBox, but it's not a common enough need to warrant including a field for _every_ NetBox installation. Instead, you can create a custom field to hold this data.
-
-Within the database, custom fields are stored as JSON data directly alongside each object. This alleviates the need for complex queries when retrieving objects.
-
-## Creating Custom Fields
-
-Custom fields may be created by navigating to Customization > Custom Fields. NetBox supports many types of custom field:
-
-* Text: Free-form text (intended for single-line use)
-* Long text: Free-form of any length; supports Markdown rendering
-* Integer: A whole number (positive or negative)
-* Decimal: A fixed-precision decimal number (4 decimal places)
-* Boolean: True or false
-* Date: A date in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD)
-* Date & time: A date and time in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS)
-* URL: This will be presented as a link in the web UI
-* JSON: Arbitrary data stored in JSON format
-* Selection: A selection of one of several pre-defined custom choices
-* Multiple selection: A selection field which supports the assignment of multiple values
-* Object: A single NetBox object of the type defined by `object_type`
-* Multiple object: One or more NetBox objects of the type defined by `object_type`
-
-Each custom field must have a name. This should be a simple database-friendly string (e.g. `tps_report`) and may contain only alphanumeric characters and underscores. You may also assign a corresponding human-friendly label (e.g. "TPS report"); the label will be displayed on web forms. A weight is also required: Higher-weight fields will be ordered lower within a form. (The default weight is 100.) If a description is provided, it will appear beneath the field in a form.
-
-Marking a field as required will force the user to provide a value for the field when creating a new object or when saving an existing object. A default value for the field may also be provided. Use "true" or "false" for boolean fields, or the exact value of a choice for selection fields.
-
-A custom field must be assigned to one or more object types, or models, in NetBox. Once created, custom fields will automatically appear as part of these models in the web UI and REST API. Note that not all models support custom fields.
-
-### Filtering
-
-The filter logic controls how values are matched when filtering objects by the custom field. Loose filtering (the default) matches on a partial value, whereas exact matching requires a complete match of the given string to a field's value. For example, exact filtering with the string "red" will only match the exact value "red", whereas loose filtering will match on the values "red", "red-orange", or "bored". Setting the filter logic to "disabled" disables filtering by the field entirely.
-
-### Grouping
-
-Related custom fields can be grouped together within the UI by assigning each the same group name. When at least one custom field for an object type has a group defined, it will appear under the group heading within the custom fields panel under the object view. All custom fields with the same group name will appear under that heading. (Note that the group names must match exactly, or each will appear as a separate heading.)
-
-This parameter has no effect on the API representation of custom field data.
-
-### Visibility & Editing
-
-When creating a custom field, users can control the conditions under which it may be displayed and edited within the NetBox user interface. The following choices are available for controlling the display of a custom field on an object:
-
-* **Always** (default): The custom field is included when viewing an object.
-* **If Set**: The custom field is included only if a value has been defined for the object.
-* **Hidden**: The custom field will never be displayed within the UI. This option is recommended for fields which are not intended for use by human users.
-
-Additionally, the following options are available for controlling whether custom field values can be altered within the NetBox UI:
-
-* **Yes** (default): The custom field's value may be modified when editing an object.
-* **No**: The custom field is displayed for reference when editing an object, but its value may not be modified.
-* **Hidden**: The custom field is not displayed when editing an object.
-
-Note that this setting has no impact on the REST or GraphQL APIs: Custom field data will always be available via either API.
-
-### Validation
-
-NetBox supports limited custom validation for custom field values. Following are the types of validation enforced for each field type:
-
-* Text: Regular expression (optional)
-* Integer: Minimum and/or maximum value (optional)
-* Selection: Must exactly match one of the prescribed choices
-
-### Custom Selection Fields
-
-Each custom selection field must designate a [choice set](../models/extras/customfieldchoiceset.md) containing at least two choices. These are specified as a comma-separated list.
-
-If a default value is specified for a selection field, it must exactly match one of the provided choices. The value of a multiple selection field will always return a list, even if only one value is selected.
-
-### Custom Object Fields
-
-An object or multi-object custom field can be used to refer to a particular NetBox object or objects as the "value" for a custom field. These custom fields must define an `object_type`, which determines the type of object to which custom field instances point.
-
-By default, an object choice field will make all objects of that type available for selection in the drop-down. The list choices can be filtered to show only objects with certain values by providing a `query_params` dict in the Related Object Filter field, as a JSON value. More information about `query_params` can be found [here](./custom-scripts.md#objectvar).
-
-## Custom Fields in Templates
-
-Several features within NetBox, such as export templates and webhooks, utilize Jinja2 templating. For convenience, objects which support custom field assignment expose custom field data through the `cf` property. This is a bit cleaner than accessing custom field data through the actual field (`custom_field_data`).
-
-For example, a custom field named `foo123` on the Site model is accessible on an instance as `{{ site.cf.foo123 }}`.
-
-## Custom Fields and the REST API
-
-When retrieving an object via the REST API, all of its custom data will be included within the `custom_fields` attribute. For example, below is the partial output of a site with two custom fields defined:
-
-```json
-{
-    "id": 123,
-    "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/123/",
-    "name": "Raleigh 42",
-    ...
-    "custom_fields": {
-        "deployed": "2018-06-19",
-        "site_code": "US-NC-RAL42"
-    },
-    ...
-```
-
-To set or change these values, simply include nested JSON data. For example:
-
-```json
-{
-    "name": "New Site",
-    "slug": "new-site",
-    "custom_fields": {
-        "deployed": "2019-03-24"
-    }
-}
-```

docs/customization/custom-links.md

@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-# Custom Links
-
-Custom links allow users to display arbitrary hyperlinks to external content within NetBox object views. These are helpful for cross-referencing related records in systems outside NetBox. For example, you might create a custom link on the device view which links to the current device in a Network Monitoring System (NMS).
-
-Custom links are created by navigating to Customization > Custom Links. Each link is associated with a particular NetBox object type (site, device, prefix, etc.) and will be displayed on relevant views. Each link has display text and a URL, and data from the NetBox item being viewed can be included in the link using [Jinja template code](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/stable/) through the variable `object`, and custom fields through `object.cf`.
-
-For example, you might define a link like this:
-
-* Text: `View NMS`
-* URL: `https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name={{ object.name }}`
-
-When viewing a device named Router4, this link would render as:
-
-```no-highlight
-<a href="https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name=Router4">View NMS</a>
-```
-
-Custom links appear as buttons in the top right corner of the page. Numeric weighting can be used to influence the ordering of links, and each link can be enabled or disabled individually.
-
-!!! warning
-    Custom links rely on user-created code to generate arbitrary HTML output, which may be dangerous. Only grant permission to create or modify custom links to trusted users.
-
-## Context Data
-
-The following context data is available within the template when rendering a custom link's text or URL.
-
-| Variable  | Description                                                                                                       |
-|-----------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `object`  | The NetBox object being displayed                                                                                 |
-| `debug`   | A boolean indicating whether debugging is enabled                                                                 |
-| `request` | The current WSGI request                                                                                          |
-| `user`    | The current user (if authenticated)                                                                               |
-| `perms`   | The [permissions](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/default/#permissions) assigned to the user |
-
-While most of the context variables listed above will have consistent attributes, the object will be an instance of the specific object being viewed when the link is rendered. Different models have different fields and properties, so you may need to some research to determine the attributes available for use within your template for a specific object type.
-
-Checking the REST API representation of an object is generally a convenient way to determine what attributes are available. You can also reference the NetBox source code directly for a comprehensive list.
-
-## Conditional Rendering
-
-Only links which render with non-empty text are included on the page. You can employ conditional Jinja2 logic to control the conditions under which a link gets rendered.
-
-For example, if you only want to display a link for active devices, you could set the link text to
-
-```jinja2
-{% if object.status == 'active' %}View NMS{% endif %}
-```
-
-The link will not appear when viewing a device with any status other than "active."
-
-As another example, if you wanted to show only devices belonging to a certain manufacturer, you could do something like this:
-
-```jinja2
-{% if object.device_type.manufacturer.name == 'Cisco' %}View NMS{% endif %}
-```
-
-The link will only appear when viewing a device with a manufacturer name of "Cisco."
-
-## Link Groups
-
-Group names can be specified to organize links into groups. Links with the same group name will render as a dropdown menu beneath a single button bearing the name of the group.
-
-## Table Columns
-
-Custom links can also be included in object tables by selecting the desired links from the table configuration form. When displayed, each link will render as a hyperlink for its corresponding object. When exported (e.g. as CSV data), each link render only its URL.

docs/customization/custom-scripts.md

@@ -1,575 +0,0 @@
-# Custom Scripts
-
-Custom scripting was introduced to provide a way for users to execute custom logic from within the NetBox UI. Custom scripts enable the user to directly and conveniently manipulate NetBox data in a prescribed fashion. They can be used to accomplish myriad tasks, such as:
-
-* Automatically populate new devices and cables in preparation for a new site deployment
-* Create a range of new reserved prefixes or IP addresses
-* Fetch data from an external source and import it to NetBox
-* Update objects with invalid or incomplete data
-
-They can also be used as a mechanism for validating the integrity of data within NetBox. Script authors can define test to check object against specific rules and conditions. For example, you can write script to check that:
-
-* All top-of-rack switches have a console connection
-* Every router has a loopback interface with an IP address assigned
-* Each interface description conforms to a standard format
-* Every site has a minimum set of VLANs defined
-* All IP addresses have a parent prefix
-
-Custom scripts are Python code which exists outside the NetBox code base, so they can be updated and changed without interfering with the core NetBox installation. And because they're completely custom, there is no inherent limitation on what a script can accomplish.
-
-!!! danger "Only install trusted scripts"
-    Custom scripts have unrestricted access to change anything in the databse and are inherently unsafe and should only be installed and run from trusted sources.  You should also review and set permissions for who can run scripts if the script can modify any data.
-
-## Writing Custom Scripts
-
-All custom scripts must inherit from the `extras.scripts.Script` base class. This class provides the functionality necessary to generate forms and log activity.
-
-```python
-from extras.scripts import Script
-
-class MyScript(Script):
-    ...
-```
-
-Scripts comprise two core components: a set of variables and a `run()` method. Variables allow your script to accept user input via the NetBox UI, but they are optional: If your script does not require any user input, there is no need to define any variables.
-
-The `run()` method is where your script's execution logic lives. (Note that your script can have as many methods as needed: this is merely the point of invocation for NetBox.)
-
-```python
-class MyScript(Script):
-    var1 = StringVar(...)
-    var2 = IntegerVar(...)
-    var3 = ObjectVar(...)
-
-    def run(self, data, commit):
-        ...
-```
-
-The `run()` method should accept two arguments:
-
-* `data` - A dictionary containing all the variable data passed via the web form.
-* `commit` - A boolean indicating whether database changes will be committed.
-
-Defining script variables is optional: You may create a script with only a `run()` method if no user input is needed.
-
-Any output generated by the script during its execution will be displayed under the "output" tab in the UI.
-
-By default, scripts within a module are ordered alphabetically in the scripts list page. To return scripts in a specific order, you can define the `script_order` variable at the end of your module. The `script_order` variable is a tuple which contains each Script class in the desired order. Any scripts that are omitted from this list will be listed last.
-
-```python
-from extras.scripts import Script
-
-class MyCustomScript(Script):
-    ...
-
-class AnotherCustomScript(Script):
-    ...
-
-script_order = (MyCustomScript, AnotherCustomScript)
-```
-
-## Script Attributes
-
-Script attributes are defined under a class named `Meta` within the script. These are optional, but encouraged.
-
-!!! warning
-    These are also defined and used as properties on the base custom script class, so don't use the same names as variables or override them in your custom script.
-
-### `name`
-
-This is the human-friendly names of your script. If omitted, the class name will be used.
-
-### `description`
-
-A human-friendly description of what your script does.
-
-### `field_order`
-
-By default, script variables will be ordered in the form as they are defined in the script. `field_order` may be defined as an iterable of field names to determine the order in which variables are rendered within a default "Script Data" group. Any fields not included in this iterable be listed last. If `fieldsets` is defined, `field_order` will be ignored.  A fieldset group for "Script Execution Parameters" will be added to the end of the form by default for the user.
-
-### `fieldsets`
-
-`fieldsets` may be defined as an iterable of field groups and their field names to determine the order in which variables are group and rendered. Any fields not included in this iterable will not be displayed in the form. If `fieldsets` is defined, `field_order` will be ignored.  A fieldset group for "Script Execution Parameters" will be added to the end of the fieldsets by default for the user.
-
-An example fieldset definition is provided below:
-
-```python
-class MyScript(Script):
-    class Meta(Script.Meta):
-        fieldsets = (
-            ('First group', ('field1', 'field2', 'field3')),
-            ('Second group', ('field4', 'field5')),
-        )
-```
-
-### `commit_default`
-
-The checkbox to commit database changes when executing a script is checked by default. Set `commit_default` to False under the script's Meta class to leave this option unchecked by default.
-
-```python
-commit_default = False
-```
-
-### `scheduling_enabled`
-
-By default, a script can be scheduled for execution at a later time. Setting `scheduling_enabled` to False disables this ability: Only immediate execution will be possible. (This also disables the ability to set a recurring execution interval.)
-
-### `job_timeout`
-
-Set the maximum allowed runtime for the script. If not set, `RQ_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT` will be used.
-
-## Accessing Request Data
-
-Details of the current HTTP request (the one being made to execute the script) are available as the instance attribute `self.request`. This can be used to infer, for example, the user executing the script and the client IP address:
-
-```python
-username = self.request.user.username
-ip_address = self.request.META.get('HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR') or \
-    self.request.META.get('REMOTE_ADDR')
-self.log_info(f"Running as user {username} (IP: {ip_address})...")
-```
-
-For a complete list of available request parameters, please see the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/request-response/).
-
-## Reading Data from Files
-
-The Script class provides two convenience methods for reading data from files:
-
-* `load_yaml`
-* `load_json`
-
-These two methods will load data in YAML or JSON format, respectively, from files within the local path (i.e. `SCRIPTS_ROOT`).
-
-**Note:** These convenience methods are deprecated and will be removed in NetBox v4.4.  These only work if running scripts within the local path, they will not work if using a storage other than ScriptFileSystemStorage.
-
-## Logging
-
-The Script object provides a set of convenient functions for recording messages at different severity levels:
-
-* `log_debug(message=None, obj=None)`
-* `log_success(message=None, obj=None)`
-* `log_info(message=None, obj=None)`
-* `log_warning(message=None, obj=None)`
-* `log_failure(message=None, obj=None)`
-
-Log messages are returned to the user upon execution of the script. Markdown rendering is supported for log messages. A message may optionally be associated with a particular object by passing it as the second argument to the logging method.
-
-## Test Methods
-
-A script can define one or more test methods to report on certain conditions. All test methods must have a name beginning with `test_` and accept no arguments beyond `self`.
-
-These methods are detected and run automatically when the script is executed, unless its `run()` method has been overridden. (When overriding `run()`, `run_tests()` can be called to run all test methods present in the script.)
-
-Calling any of these logging methods without a message will increment the relevant counter, but will not generate an output line in the script's log.
-
-!!! info
-    This functionality was ported from [legacy reports](./reports.md) in NetBox v4.0.
-
-### Example
-
-```
-from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices
-from dcim.models import ConsolePort, Device, PowerPort
-from extras.scripts import Script
-
-
-class DeviceConnectionsReport(Script):
-    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
-
-    def test_console_connection(self):
-
-        # Check that every console port for every active device has a connection defined.
-        active = DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE
-        for console_port in ConsolePort.objects.prefetch_related('device').filter(device__status=active):
-            if not console_port.connected_endpoints:
-                self.log_failure(
-                    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}",
-                    console_port.device,
-                )
-            elif not console_port.connection_status:
-                self.log_warning(
-                    f"Console connection for {console_port.name} marked as planned",
-                    console_port.device,
-                )
-            else:
-                self.log_success("Passed", console_port.device)
-
-    def test_power_connections(self):
-
-        # Check that every active device has at least two connected power supplies.
-        for device in Device.objects.filter(status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE):
-            connected_ports = 0
-            for power_port in PowerPort.objects.filter(device=device):
-                if power_port.connected_endpoints:
-                    connected_ports += 1
-                    if not power_port.path.is_active:
-                        self.log_warning(
-                            f"Power connection for {power_port.name} marked as planned",
-                            device,
-                        )
-            if connected_ports < 2:
-                self.log_failure(
-                    f"{connected_ports} connected power supplies found (2 needed)",
-                    device,
-                )
-            else:
-                self.log_success("Passed", device)
-```
-
-## Change Logging
-
-To generate the correct change log data when editing an existing object, a snapshot of the object must be taken before making any changes to the object.
-
-```python
-if obj.pk and hasattr(obj, 'snapshot'):
-    obj.snapshot()
-
-obj.property = "New Value"
-obj.full_clean()
-obj.save()
-```
-
-## Error handling
-
-Sometimes things go wrong and a script will run into an `Exception`. If that happens and an uncaught exception is raised by the custom script, the execution is aborted and a full stack trace is reported.
-
-Although this is helpful for debugging, in some situations it might be required to cleanly abort the execution of a custom script (e.g. because of invalid input data) and thereby make sure no changes are performed on the database. In this case the script can throw an `AbortScript` exception, which will prevent the stack trace from being reported, but still terminating the script's execution and reporting a given error message.
-
-```python
-from utilities.exceptions import AbortScript
-
-if some_error:
-    raise AbortScript("Some meaningful error message")
-```
-
-## Variable Reference
-
-### Default Options
-
-All custom script variables support the following default options:
-
-* `default` - The field's default value
-* `description` - A brief user-friendly description of the field
-* `label` - The field name to be displayed in the rendered form
-* `required` - Indicates whether the field is mandatory (all fields are required by default)
-* `widget` - The class of form widget to use (see the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/forms/widgets/))
-
-### StringVar
-
-Stores a string of characters (i.e. text). Options include:
-
-* `min_length` - Minimum number of characters
-* `max_length` - Maximum number of characters
-* `regex` - A regular expression against which the provided value must match
-
-Note that `min_length` and `max_length` can be set to the same number to effect a fixed-length field.
-
-### TextVar
-
-Arbitrary text of any length. Renders as a multi-line text input field.
-
-### IntegerVar
-
-Stores a numeric integer. Options include:
-
-* `min_value` - Minimum value
-* `max_value` - Maximum value
-
-### DecimalVar
-
-Stores a numeric decimal. Options include:
-
-* `min_value` - Minimum value
-* `max_value` - Maximum value
-* `max_digits` - Maximum number of digits, including decimal places
-* `decimal_places` - Number of decimal places
-
-### BooleanVar
-
-A true/false flag. This field has no options beyond the defaults listed above.
-
-### ChoiceVar
-
-A set of choices from which the user can select one.
-
-* `choices` - A list of `(value, label)` tuples representing the available choices. For example:
-
-```python
-CHOICES = (
-    ('n', 'North'),
-    ('s', 'South'),
-    ('e', 'East'),
-    ('w', 'West')
-)
-
-direction = ChoiceVar(choices=CHOICES)
-```
-
-In the example above, selecting the choice labeled "North" will submit the value `n`.
-
-### MultiChoiceVar
-
-Similar to `ChoiceVar`, but allows for the selection of multiple choices.
-
-### ObjectVar
-
-A particular object within NetBox. Each ObjectVar must specify a particular model, and allows the user to select one of the available instances. ObjectVar accepts several arguments, listed below.
-
-* `model` - The model class
-* `query_params` - A dictionary of query parameters to use when retrieving available options (optional)
-* `context` - A custom dictionary mapping template context variables to fields, used when rendering `<option>` elements within the dropdown menu (optional; see below)
-* `null_option` - A label representing a "null" or empty choice (optional)
-* `selector` - A boolean that, when True, includes an advanced object selection widget to assist the user in identifying the desired object (optional; False by default)
-
-To limit the selections available within the list, additional query parameters can be passed as the `query_params` dictionary. For example, to show only devices with an "active" status:
-
-```python
-device = ObjectVar(
-    model=Device,
-    query_params={
-        'status': 'active'
-    }
-)
-```
-
-Multiple values can be specified by assigning a list to the dictionary key. It is also possible to reference the value of other fields in the form by prepending a dollar sign (`$`) to the variable's name.
-
-```python
-region = ObjectVar(
-    model=Region
-)
-site = ObjectVar(
-    model=Site,
-    query_params={
-        'region_id': '$region'
-    }
-)
-```
-
-#### Context Variables
-
-Custom context variables can be passed to override the default attribute names or to display additional information, such as a parent object.
-
-| Name          | Default         | Description                                                                  |
-|---------------|-----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `value`       | `"id"`          | The attribute which contains the option's value                              |
-| `label`       | `"display"`     | The attribute used as the option's human-friendly label                      |
-| `description` | `"description"` | The attribute to use as a description                                        |
-| `depth`[^1]   | `"_depth"`      | The attribute which indicates an object's depth within a recursive hierarchy |
-| `disabled`    | --              | The attribute which, if true, signifies that the option should be disabled   |
-| `parent`      | --              | The attribute which represents the object's parent object                    |
-| `count`[^1]   | --              | The attribute which contains a numeric count of related objects              |
-
-[^1]: The value of this attribute must be a positive integer
-
-### MultiObjectVar
-
-Similar to `ObjectVar`, but allows for the selection of multiple objects.
-
-### FileVar
-
-An uploaded file. Note that uploaded files are present in memory only for the duration of the script's execution: They will not be automatically saved for future use. The script is responsible for writing file contents to disk where necessary.
-
-### IPAddressVar
-
-An IPv4 or IPv6 address, without a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPAddress` object.
-
-### IPAddressWithMaskVar
-
-An IPv4 or IPv6 address with a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPNetwork` object which includes the mask.
-
-### IPNetworkVar
-
-An IPv4 or IPv6 network with a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPNetwork` object. Two attributes are available to validate the provided mask:
-
-* `min_prefix_length` - Minimum length of the mask
-* `max_prefix_length` - Maximum length of the mask
-
-### DateVar
-
-A calendar date. Returns a `datetime.date` object.
-
-### DateTimeVar
-
-A complete date & time. Returns a `datetime.datetime` object.
-
-## Running Custom Scripts
-
-!!! note
-    To run a custom script, a user must be assigned permissions for `Extras > Script`, `Extras > Script Module`, and `Core > Managed File` objects. They must also be assigned the `extras.run_script` permission. This is achieved by assigning the user (or group) a permission on the Script object and specifying the `run` action in "Permissions" as shown below.
-
-    ![Adding the run action to a permission](../media/run_permission.png)
-
-### Via the Web UI
-
-Custom scripts can be run via the web UI by navigating to the script, completing any required form data, and clicking the "run script" button. It is possible to schedule a script to be executed at specified time in the future. A scheduled script can be canceled by deleting the associated job result object.
-
-#### Prefilling variables via URL parameters
-
-Script form fields can be prefilled by appending query parameters to the script URL. Each parameter name must match the variable name defined on the script class. Prefilled values are treated as initial values and can be edited before execution. Multiple values can be supplied by repeating the same parameter. Query values must be percent‑encoded where required (for example, spaces as `%20`).
-
-Examples:
-
-For string and integer variables, when a script defines:
-
-```python
-from extras.scripts import Script, StringVar, IntegerVar
-
-class MyScript(Script):
-    name = StringVar()
-    count = IntegerVar()
-```
-
-the following URL prefills the `name` and `count` fields:
-
-```
-https://<netbox>/extras/scripts/<script_id>/?name=Branch42&count=3
-```
-
-For object variables (`ObjectVar`), supply the object’s primary key (PK):
-
-```
-https://<netbox>/extras/scripts/<script_id>/?device=1
-```
-
-If an object ID cannot be resolved or the object is not visible to the requesting user, the field remains unpopulated.
-
-Supported variable types:
-
-| Variable class           | Expected input                  | Example query string                        |
-|--------------------------|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------------|
-| `StringVar`              | string (percent‑encoded)        | `?name=Branch42`                            |
-| `TextVar`                | string (percent‑encoded)        | `?notes=Initial%20value`                    |
-| `IntegerVar`             | integer                         | `?count=3`                                  |
-| `DecimalVar`             | decimal number                  | `?ratio=0.75`                               |
-| `BooleanVar`             | value → `True`; empty → `False` | `?enabled=true` (True), `?enabled=` (False) |
-| `ChoiceVar`              | choice value (not label)        | `?role=edge`                                |
-| `MultiChoiceVar`         | choice values (repeat)          | `?roles=edge&roles=core`                    |
-| `ObjectVar(Device)`      | PK (integer)                    | `?device=1`                                 |
-| `MultiObjectVar(Device)` | PKs (repeat)                    | `?devices=1&devices=2`                      |
-| `IPAddressVar`           | IP address                      | `?ip=198.51.100.10`                         |
-| `IPAddressWithMaskVar`   | IP address with mask            | `?addr=192.0.2.1/24`                        |
-| `IPNetworkVar`           | IP network prefix               | `?network=2001:db8::/64`                    |
-| `DateVar`                | date `YYYY-MM-DD`               | `?date=2025-01-05`                          |
-| `DateTimeVar`            | ISO datetime                    | `?when=2025-01-05T14:30:00`                 |
-| `FileVar`                | — (not supported)               | —                                           |
-
-!!! note
-    - The parameter names above are examples; use the actual variable attribute names defined by the script.
-    - For `BooleanVar`, only an empty value (`?enabled=`) unchecks the box; any other value including `false` or `0` checks it.
-    - File uploads (`FileVar`) cannot be prefilled via URL parameters.
-
-### Via the API
-
-To run a script via the REST API, issue a POST request to the script's endpoint specifying the form data and commitment. For example, to run a script named `example.MyReport`, we would make a request such as the following:
-
-```no-highlight
-curl -X POST \
--H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
--H "Content-Type: application/json" \
--H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
-http://netbox/api/extras/scripts/example.MyReport/ \
---data '{"data": {"foo": "somevalue", "bar": 123}, "commit": true}'
-```
-
-Optionally `schedule_at` can be passed in the form data with a datetime string to schedule a script at the specified date and time.
-
-### Via the CLI
-
-Scripts can be run on the CLI by invoking the management command:
-
-```
-python3 manage.py runscript [--commit] [--loglevel {debug,info,warning,error,critical}] [--data "<data>"] <module>.<script>
-```
-
-The required ``<module>.<script>`` argument is the script to run where ``<module>`` is the name of the python file in the ``scripts`` directory without the ``.py`` extension and ``<script>`` is the name of the script class in the ``<module>`` to run.
-
-The optional ``--data "<data>"`` argument is the data to send to the script
-
-The optional ``--loglevel`` argument is the desired logging level to output to the console.
-
-The optional ``--commit`` argument will commit any changes in the script to the database.
-
-## Example
-
-Below is an example script that creates new objects for a planned site. The user is prompted for three variables:
-
-* The name of the new site
-* The device model (a filtered list of defined device types)
-* The number of access switches to create
-
-These variables are presented as a web form to be completed by the user. Once submitted, the script's `run()` method is called to create the appropriate objects.
-
-```python
-from django.utils.text import slugify
-
-from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices, SiteStatusChoices
-from dcim.models import Device, DeviceRole, DeviceType, Manufacturer, Site
-from extras.scripts import *
-
-
-class NewBranchScript(Script):
-
-    class Meta(Script.Meta):
-        name = "New Branch"
-        description = "Provision a new branch site"
-        field_order = ['site_name', 'switch_count', 'switch_model']
-
-    site_name = StringVar(
-        description="Name of the new site"
-    )
-    switch_count = IntegerVar(
-        description="Number of access switches to create"
-    )
-    manufacturer = ObjectVar(
-        model=Manufacturer,
-        required=False
-    )
-    switch_model = ObjectVar(
-        description="Access switch model",
-        model=DeviceType,
-        query_params={
-            'manufacturer_id': '$manufacturer'
-        }
-    )
-
-    def run(self, data, commit):
-
-        # Create the new site
-        site = Site(
-            name=data['site_name'],
-            slug=slugify(data['site_name']),
-            status=SiteStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED
-        )
-        site.full_clean()
-        site.save()
-        self.log_success(f"Created new site: {site}")
-
-        # Create access switches
-        switch_role = DeviceRole.objects.get(name='Access Switch')
-        for i in range(1, data['switch_count'] + 1):
-            switch = Device(
-                device_type=data['switch_model'],
-                name=f'{site.slug}-switch{i}',
-                site=site,
-                status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED,
-                role=switch_role
-            )
-            switch.full_clean()
-            switch.save()
-            self.log_success(f"Created new switch: {switch}")
-
-        # Generate a CSV table of new devices
-        output = [
-            'name,make,model'
-        ]
-        for switch in Device.objects.filter(site=site):
-            attrs = [
-                switch.name,
-                switch.device_type.manufacturer.name,
-                switch.device_type.model
-            ]
-            output.append(','.join(attrs))
-
-        return '\n'.join(output)
-```

docs/customization/custom-validation.md

@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-# Custom Validation
-
-NetBox validates every object prior to it being written to the database to ensure data integrity. This validation includes things like checking for proper formatting and that references to related objects are valid. However, you may wish to supplement this validation with some rules of your own. For example, perhaps you require that every site's name conforms to a specific pattern.  This can be done using custom validation rules.
-
-## Custom Validation Rules
-
-Custom validation rules are expressed as a mapping of object attributes to a set of rules to which that attribute must conform. For example:
-
-```json
-{
-  "name": {
-    "min_length": 5,
-    "max_length": 30
-  }
-}
-```
-
-This defines a custom validator which checks that the length of the `name` attribute for an object is at least five characters long, and no longer than 30 characters. This validation is executed _after_ NetBox has performed its own internal validation.
-
-### Validation Types
-
-The `CustomValidator` class supports several validation types:
-
-* `min`: Minimum value
-* `max`: Maximum value
-* `min_length`: Minimum string length
-* `max_length`: Maximum string length
-* `regex`: Application of a [regular expression](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression)
-* `required`: A value must be specified
-* `prohibited`: A value must _not_ be specified
-* `eq`: A value must be equal to the specified value
-* `neq`: A value must _not_ be equal to the specified value
-
-The `min` and `max` types should be defined for numeric values, whereas `min_length`, `max_length`, and `regex` are suitable for character strings (text values). The `required` and `prohibited` validators may be used for any field, and should be passed a value of `True`.
-
-!!! warning
-    Bear in mind that these validators merely supplement NetBox's own validation: They will not override it. For example, if a certain model field is required by NetBox, setting a validator for it with `{'prohibited': True}` will not work.
-
-### Custom Validation Logic
-
-There may be instances where the provided validation types are insufficient. NetBox provides a `CustomValidator` class which can be extended to enforce arbitrary validation logic by overriding its `validate()` method, and calling `fail()` when an unsatisfactory condition is detected. The `validate()` method should accept an instance (the object being saved) as well as the current request effecting the change.
-
-```python
-from extras.validators import CustomValidator
-
-class MyValidator(CustomValidator):
-
-    def validate(self, instance, request):
-        if instance.status == 'active' and not instance.description:
-            self.fail("Active sites must have a description set!", field='status')
-```
-
-The `fail()` method may optionally specify a field with which to associate the supplied error message. If specified, the error message will appear to the user as associated with this field. If omitted, the error message will not be associated with any field.
-
-## Assigning Custom Validators
-
-Custom validators are associated with specific NetBox models under the [CUSTOM_VALIDATORS](../configuration/data-validation.md#custom_validators) configuration parameter. There are three manners by which custom validation rules can be defined:
-
-1. Plain JSON mapping (no custom logic)
-2. Dotted path to a custom validator class
-3. Direct reference to a custom validator class
-
-### Plain Data
-
-For cases where custom logic is not needed, it is sufficient to pass validation rules as plain JSON-compatible objects. This approach typically affords the most portability for your configuration. For instance:
-
-```python
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    "dcim.site": [
-        {
-            "name": {
-                "min_length": 5,
-                "max_length": 30,
-            }
-        }
-    ],
-    "dcim.device": [
-        {
-            "platform": {
-                "required": True,
-            }
-        }
-    ]
-}
-```
-
-#### Referencing Related Object Attributes
-
-The attributes of a related object can be referenced by specifying a dotted path. For example, to reference the name of a region to which a site is assigned, use `region.name`:
-
-```python
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    "dcim.site": [
-        {
-            "region.name": {
-                "neq": "New York"
-            }
-        }
-    ]
-}
-```
-
-#### Validating Request Parameters
-
-In addition to validating object attributes, custom validators can also match against parameters of the current request (where available). For example, the following rule will permit only the user named "admin" to modify an object:
-
-```json
-{
-  "request.user.username": {
-    "eq": "admin"
-  }
-}
-```
-
-!!! tip
-    Custom validation should generally not be used to enforce permissions. NetBox provides a robust [object-based permissions](../administration/permissions.md) mechanism which should be used for this purpose.
-
-### Dotted Path to Class
-
-In instances where a custom validator class is needed, it can be referenced by its Python path (relative to NetBox's working directory):
-
-```python
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    'dcim.site': (
-        'my_validators.Validator1',
-        'my_validators.Validator2',
-    ),
-    'dcim.device': (
-        'my_validators.Validator3',
-    )
-}
-```
-
-### Direct Class Reference
-
-This approach requires each class being instantiated to be imported directly within the Python configuration file.
-
-```python
-from my_validators import Validator1, Validator2, Validator3
-
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    'dcim.site': (
-        Validator1(),
-        Validator2(),
-    ),
-    'dcim.device': (
-        Validator3(),
-    )
-}
-```
-
-!!! note
-    Even if defining only a single validator, it must be passed as an iterable.

docs/customization/export-templates.md

@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-# Export Templates
-
-NetBox allows users to define custom templates that can be used when exporting objects. To create an export template, navigate to Customization > Export Templates.
-
-Each export template is associated with a certain type of object. For instance, if you create an export template for VLANs, your custom template will appear under the "Export" button on the VLANs list. Each export template must have a name, and may optionally designate a specific export [MIME type](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Basics_of_HTTP/MIME_types) and/or file extension.
-
-Export templates must be written in [Jinja2](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/).
-
-!!! note
-    The name `table` is reserved for internal use.
-
-!!! warning
-    Export templates are rendered using user-submitted code, which may pose security risks under certain conditions. Only grant permission to create or modify export templates to trusted users.
-
-The list of objects returned from the database when rendering an export template is stored in the `queryset` variable, which you'll typically want to iterate through using a `for` loop. Object properties can be access by name. For example:
-
-```jinja2
-{% for rack in queryset %}
-Rack: {{ rack.name }}
-Site: {{ rack.site.name }}
-Height: {{ rack.u_height }}U
-{% endfor %}
-```
-
-To access custom fields of an object within a template, use the `cf` attribute. For example, `{{ obj.cf.color }}` will return the value (if any) for a custom field named `color` on `obj`.
-
-If you need to use the config context data in an export template, you'll should use the function `get_config_context` to get all the config context data. For example:
-
-```
-{% for server in queryset %}
-{% set data = server.get_config_context() %}
-{{ data.syslog }}
-{% endfor %}
-```
-
-The `as_attachment` attribute of an export template controls its behavior when rendered. If true, the rendered content will be returned to the user as a downloadable file. If false, it will be displayed within the browser. (This may be handy e.g. for generating HTML content.)
-
-A MIME type and file extension can optionally be defined for each export template. The default MIME type is `text/plain`.
-
-
-## REST API Integration
-
-When it is necessary to provide authentication credentials (such as when [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../configuration/security.md#login_required) has been enabled), it is recommended to render export templates via the REST API. This allows the client to specify an authentication token. To render an export template via the REST API, make a `GET` request to the model's list endpoint and append the `export` parameter specifying the export template name. For example:
-
-```
-GET /api/dcim/sites/?export=MyTemplateName
-```
-
-Note that the body of the response will contain only the rendered export template content, as opposed to a JSON object or list.
-
-## Example
-
-Here's an example device export template that will generate a simple Nagios configuration from a list of devices.
-
-```
-{% for device in queryset %}{% if device.status and device.primary_ip %}define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               {{ device.name }}
-        address                 {{ device.primary_ip.address.ip }}
-}
-{% endif %}{% endfor %}
-```
-
-The generated output will look something like this:
-
-```
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch1
-        address                 192.0.2.1
-}
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch2
-        address                 192.0.2.2
-}
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch3
-        address                 192.0.2.3
-}
-```

docs/customization/reports.md

@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-# NetBox Reports
-
-!!! warning
-    Reports are deprecated beginning with NetBox v4.0, and their functionality has been merged with [custom scripts](./custom-scripts.md). While backward compatibility has been maintained, users are advised to convert legacy reports into custom scripts soon, as support for legacy reports will be removed in a future release.
-
-## Converting Reports to Scripts
-
-### Step 1: Update Class Definition
-
-Change the parent class from `Report` to `Script`:
-
-```python title="Old code"
-from extras.reports import Report
-
-class MyReport(Report):
-```
-
-```python title="New code"
-from extras.scripts import Script
-
-class MyReport(Script):
-```
-
-### Step 2: Update Logging Calls
-
-Reports and scripts both provide logging methods, however their signatures differ. All script logging methods accept a message as the first parameter, and accept an object as an optional second parameter.
-
-Additionally, the Report class' generic `log()` method is **not** available on Script. Users are advised to replace calls of this method with `log_info()`.
-
-Use the table below as a reference when updating these methods.
-
-| Report (old)                  | Script (New)                |
-|-------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| `log(message)`                | `log_info(message)`         |
-| `log_debug(obj, message)`[^1] | `log_debug(message, obj)`   |
-| `log_info(obj, message)`      | `log_info(message, obj)`    |
-| `log_success(obj, message)`   | `log_success(message, obj)` |
-| `log_warning(obj, message)`   | `log_warning(message, obj)` |
-| `log_failure(obj, message)`   | `log_failure(message, obj)` |
-
-[^1]: `log_debug()` was added to the Report class in v4.0 to avoid confusion with the same method on Script
-
-```python title="Old code"
-self.log_failure(
-    console_port.device,
-    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}"
-)
-```
-
-```python title="New code"
-self.log_failure(
-    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}",
-    obj=console_port.device,
-)
-```
-
-### Other Notes
-
-Existing reports will be converted to scripts automatically upon upgrading to NetBox v4.0, and previous job history will be retained. However, users are advised to convert legacy reports into custom scripts at the earliest opportunity, as support for legacy reports will be removed in a future release.
-
-The `pre_run()` and `post_run()` Report methods have been carried over to Script. These are called automatically by Script's `run()` method. (Note that if you opt to override this method, you are responsible for calling `pre_run()` and `post_run()` where applicable.)
-
-The `is_valid()` method on Report is no longer needed and has been removed.

docs/data-model/circuits.md

@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+The circuits component of NetBox deals with the management of long-haul Internet and private transit links and providers.
+
+# Providers
+
+A provider is any entity which provides some form of connectivity. While this obviously includes carriers which offer Internet and private transit service, it might also include Internet exchange (IX) points and even organizations with whom you peer directly.
+
+Each provider may be assigned an autonomous system number (ASN), an account number, and contact information.
+
+---
+
+# Circuits
+
+A circuit represents a single physical data link connecting two endpoints. Each circuit belongs to a provider and must be assigned a circuit ID which is unique to that provider.
+
+### Circuit Types
+
+Circuits are classified by type. For example, you might define circuit types for:
+
+* Internet transit
+* Out-of-band connectivity
+* Peering
+* Private backhaul
+
+Circuit types are fully customizable.
+
+### Circuit Terminations
+
+A circuit may have one or two terminations, annotated as the "A" and "Z" sides of the circuit. A single-termination circuit can be used when you don't know (or care) about the far end of a circuit (for example, an Internet access circuit which connects to a transit provider). A dual-termination circuit is useful for tracking circuits which connect two sites.
+
+Each circuit termination is tied to a site, and optionally to a specific device and interface within that site. Each termination can be assigned a separate downstream and upstream speed independent from one another. Fields are also available to track cross-connect and patch panel details.
+
+!!! note
+    A circuit represents a physical link, and cannot have more than two endpoints. When modeling a multi-point topology, each leg of the topology must be defined as a discrete circuit.

docs/data-model/dcim.md

@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+Data center infrastructure management (DCIM) entails all physical assets: sites, racks, devices, cabling, etc.
+
+# Sites
+
+How you choose to use sites will depend on the nature of your organization, but typically a site will equate to a building or campus. For example, a chain of banks might create a site to represent each of its branches, a site for its corporate headquarters, and two additional sites for its presence in two colocation facilities.
+
+Sites can be assigned an optional facility ID to identify the actual facility housing colocated equipment, and an Autonomous System (AS) number.
+
+### Regions
+
+Sites can be arranged geographically using regions. A region might represent a continent, country, city, campus, or other area depending on your use case. Regions can be nested recursively to construct a hierarchy. For example, you might define several country regions, and within each of those several state or city regions to which sites are assigned.
+
+---
+
+# Racks
+
+The rack model represents a physical two- or four-post equipment rack in which equipment is mounted. Each rack is assigned to a site. Rack height is measured in *rack units* (U); racks are commonly between 42U and 48U, but NetBox allows you to define racks of arbitrary height. Each rack has two faces (front and rear) on which devices can be mounted.
+
+Each rack is assigned a name and (optionally) a separate facility ID. This is helpful when leasing space in a data center your organization does not own: The facility will often assign a seemingly arbitrary ID to a rack (for example, "M204.313") whereas internally you refer to is simply as "R113." The facility ID can alternatively be used to store a rack's serial number.
+
+The available rack types include 2- and 4-post frames, 4-post cabinet, and wall-mounted frame and cabinet. Rail-to-rail width may be 19 or 23 inches.
+
+### Rack Groups
+
+Racks can be arranged into groups. As with sites, how you choose to designate rack groups will depend on the nature of your organization. For example, if each site represents a campus, each group might represent a building within a campus. If each site represents a building, each rack group might equate to a floor or room.
+
+Each group is assigned to a parent site for easy navigation. Hierarchical recursion of rack groups is not supported.
+
+### Rack Roles
+
+Each rack can optionally be assigned a functional role. For example, you might designate a rack for compute or storage resources, or to house colocated customer devices. Rack roles are fully customizable.
+
+### Rack Space Reservations
+
+Users can reserve units within a rack for future use. Multiple non-contiguous rack units can be associated with a single reservation (but reservations cannot span multiple racks).
+
+---
+
+# Device Types
+
+A device type represents a particular hardware model that exists in the real world. Device types describe the physical attributes of a device (rack height and depth), its class (e.g. console server, PDU, etc.), and its individual components (console, power, and data).
+
+Device types are instantiated as devices installed within racks. For example, you might define a device type to represent a Juniper EX4300-48T network switch with 48 Ethernet interfaces. You can then create multiple devices of this type named "switch1," "switch2," and so on. Each device will inherit the components (such as interfaces) of its device type.
+
+### Manufacturers
+
+Each device type belongs to one manufacturer; e.g. Cisco, Opengear, or APC. The model number of a device type must be unique to its manufacturer.
+
+### Component Templates
+
+Each device type is assigned a number of component templates which define the physical interfaces a device has. These are:
+
+* Console ports
+* Console server ports
+* Power ports
+* Power outlets
+* Interfaces
+* Device bays
+
+Whenever a new device is created, it is automatically assigned components per the templates assigned to its device type. For example, a Juniper EX4300-48T device type might have the following component templates:
+
+* One template for a console port ("Console")
+* Two templates for power ports ("PSU0" and "PSU1")
+* 48 templates for 1GE interfaces ("ge-0/0/0" through "ge-0/0/47")
+* Four templates for 10GE interfaces ("xe-0/2/0" through "xe-0/2/3")
+
+Once component templates have been created, every new device that you create as an instance of this type will automatically be assigned each of the components listed above.
+
+!!! note
+    Assignment of components from templates occurs only at the time of device creation. If you modify the templates of a device type, it will not affect devices which have already been created. However, you always have the option of adding, modifying, or deleting components of existing devices individually.
+
+---
+
+# Devices
+
+Every piece of hardware which is installed within a rack exists in NetBox as a device. Devices are measured in rack units (U) and depth. 0U devices which can be installed in a rack but don't consume vertical rack space (such as a vertically-mounted power distribution unit) can also be defined.
+
+When assigning a multi-U device to a rack, it is considered to be mounted in the lowest-numbered rack unit which it occupies. For example, a 3U device which occupies U8 through U10 shows as being mounted in U8. This logic applies to racks with both ascending and descending unit numbering.
+
+A device is said to be "full depth" if its installation on one rack face prevents the installation of any other device on the opposite face within the same rack unit(s). This could be either because the device is physically too deep to allow a device behind it, or because the installation of an opposing device would impede air flow.
+
+### Roles
+
+NetBox allows for the definition of arbitrary device roles by which devices can be organized. For example, you might create roles for core switches, distribution switches, and access switches. In the interest of simplicity, a device can belong to only one role.
+
+### Platforms
+
+A device's platform is used to denote the type of software running on it. This can be helpful when it is necessary to distinguish between, for instance, different feature sets. Note that two devices of same type may be assigned different platforms: for example, one Juniper MX240 running Junos 14 and another running Junos 15.
+
+The assignment of platforms to devices is an optional feature, and may be disregarded if not desired.
+
+### Inventory Items
+
+Inventory items represent hardware components installed within a device, such as a power supply or CPU. Currently, these are used merely for inventory tracking, although future development might see their functionality expand. Each item can optionally be assigned a manufacturer.
+
+!!! note
+    Prior to version 2.0, inventory items were called modules.
+
+### Components
+
+There are six types of device components which comprise all of the interconnection logic with NetBox:
+
+* Console ports
+* Console server ports
+* Power ports
+* Power outlets
+* Interfaces
+* Device bays
+
+Console ports connect only to console server ports, and power ports connect only to power outlets. Interfaces connect to one another in a symmetric manner: If interface A connects to interface B, interface B therefore connects to interface A. (The relationship between two interfaces is actually represented in the database by an InterfaceConnection object, but this is transparent to the user.) Each type of connection can be classified as either *planned* or *connected*. This allows for easily denoting connections which have not yet been installed.
+
+Each interface is a assigned a form factor denoting its physical properties. Two special form factors exist: the "virtual" form factor can be used to designate logical interfaces (such as SVIs), and the "LAG" form factor can be used to desinate link aggregation groups to which physical interfaces can be assigned. Each interface can also be designated as management-only (for out-of-band management) and assigned a short description.
+
+Device bays represent the ability of a device to house child devices. For example, you might install four blade servers into a 2U chassis. The chassis would appear in the rack elevation as a 2U device with four device bays. Each server within it would be defined as a 0U device installed in one of the device bays. Child devices do not appear on rack elevations, but they are included in the "Non-Racked Devices" list within the rack view.
+
+---
+
+# Virtual Chassis
+
+A virtual chassis represents a set of devices which share a single control plane: for example, a stack of switches which are managed as a single device. Each device in the virtual chassis is assigned a position and (optionally) a priority. Exactly one device is designated the virtual chassis master: This device will typically be assigned a name, secrets, services, and other attributes related to its management.
+
+It's important to recognize the distinction between a virtual chassis and a chassis-based device. For instance, a virtual chassis is not used to model a chassis switch with removable line cards such as the Juniper EX9208, as its line cards are _not_ physically separate devices capable of operating independently.

docs/data-model/extras.md

@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+This section entails features of NetBox which are not crucial to its primary functions, but provide additional value.
+
+# Custom Fields
+
+Each object in NetBox is represented in the database as a discrete table, and each attribute of an object exists as a column within its table. For example, sites are stored in the `dcim_site` table, which has columns named `name`, `facility`, `physical_address`, and so on. As new attributes are added to objects throughout the development of NetBox, tables are expanded to include new rows.
+
+However, some users might want to associate with objects attributes that are somewhat esoteric in nature, and that would not make sense to include in the core NetBox database schema. For instance, suppose your organization needs to associate each device with a ticket number pointing to the support ticket that was opened to have it installed. This is certainly a legitimate use for NetBox, but it's perhaps not a common enough need to warrant expanding the internal data schema. Instead, you can create a custom field to hold this data.
+
+Custom fields must be created through the admin UI under Extras > Custom Fields. To create a new custom field, select the object(s) to which you want it to apply, and the type of field it will be. NetBox supports six field types:
+
+* Free-form text (up to 255 characters)
+* Integer
+* Boolean (true/false)
+* Date
+* URL
+* Selection
+
+Assign the field a name. This should be a simple database-friendly string, e.g. `tps_report`. You may optionally assign the field a human-friendly label (e.g. "TPS report") as well; the label will be displayed on forms. If a description is provided, it will appear beneath the field in a form.
+
+Marking the field as required will require the user to provide a value for the field when creating a new object or when saving an existing object. A default value for the field may also be provided. Use "true" or "false" for boolean fields. (The default value has no effect for selection fields.)
+
+When creating a selection field, you should create at least two choices. These choices will be arranged first by weight, with lower weights appearing higher in the list, and then alphabetically.
+
+## Using Custom Fields
+
+When a single object is edited, the form will include any custom fields which have been defined for the object type. These fields are included in the "Custom Fields" panel. On the backend, each custom field value is saved separately from the core object as an independent database call, so it's best to avoid adding too many custom fields per object.
+
+When editing multiple objects, custom field values are saved in bulk. There is no significant difference in overhead when saving a custom field value for 100 objects versus one object. However, the bulk operation must be performed separately for each custom field.
+
+# Export Templates
+
+NetBox allows users to define custom templates that can be used when exporting objects. To create an export template, navigate to Extras > Export Templates under the admin interface.
+
+Each export template is associated with a certain type of object. For instance, if you create an export template for VLANs, your custom template will appear under the "Export" button on the VLANs list.
+
+Export templates are written in [Django's template language](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/templates/language/), which is very similar to Jinja2. The list of objects returned from the database is stored in the `queryset` variable, which you'll typically want to iterate through using a `for` loop. Object properties can be access by name. For example:
+
+```
+{% for rack in queryset %}
+Rack: {{ rack.name }}
+Site: {{ rack.site.name }}
+Height: {{ rack.u_height }}U
+{% endfor %}
+```
+
+To access custom fields of an object within a template, use the `cf` attribute. For example, `{{ obj.cf.color }}` will return the value (if any) for a custom field named `color` on `obj`.
+
+A MIME type and file extension can optionally be defined for each export template. The default MIME type is `text/plain`.
+
+## Example
+
+Here's an example device export template that will generate a simple Nagios configuration from a list of devices.
+
+```
+{% for device in queryset %}{% if device.status and device.primary_ip %}define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               {{ device.name }}
+        address                 {{ device.primary_ip.address.ip }}
+}
+{% endif %}{% endfor %}
+```
+
+The generated output will look something like this:
+
+```
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch1
+        address                 192.0.2.1
+}
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch2
+        address                 192.0.2.2
+}
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch3
+        address                 192.0.2.3
+}
+```
+
+# Graphs
+
+NetBox does not have the ability to generate graphs natively, but this feature allows you to embed contextual graphs from an external resources (such as a monitoring system) inside the site, provider, and interface views. Each embedded graph must be defined with the following parameters:
+
+* **Type:** Site, provider, or interface. This determines in which view the graph will be displayed.
+* **Weight:** Determines the order in which graphs are displayed (lower weights are displayed first). Graphs with equal weights will be ordered alphabetically by name.
+* **Name:** The title to display above the graph.
+* **Source URL:** The source of the image to be embedded. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
+* **Link URL (optional):** A URL to which the graph will be linked. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
+
+## Examples
+
+You only need to define one graph object for each graph you want to include when viewing an object. For example, if you want to include a graph of traffic through an interface over the past five minutes, your graph source might looks like this:
+
+```
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=5m
+```
+
+You can define several graphs to provide multiple contexts when viewing an object. For example:
+
+```
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=24h
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=errors&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
+```
+
+# Topology Maps
+
+NetBox can generate simple topology maps from the physical network connections recorded in its database. First, you'll need to create a topology map definition under the admin UI at Extras > Topology Maps.
+
+Each topology map is associated with a site. A site can have multiple topology maps, which might each illustrate a different aspect of its infrastructure (for example, production versus backend infrastructure).
+
+To define the scope of a topology map, decide which devices you want to include. The map will only include interface connections with both points terminated on an included device. Specify the devices to include in the **device patterns** field by entering a list of [regular expressions](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression) matching device names. For example, if you wanted to include "mgmt-switch1" through "mgmt-switch99", you might use the regex `mgmt-switch\d+`.
+
+Each line of the **device patterns** field represents a hierarchical layer within the topology map. For example, you might map a traditional network with core, distribution, and access tiers like this:
+
+```
+core-switch-[abcd]
+dist-switch\d
+access-switch\d+;oob-switch\d+
+```
+
+Note that you can combine multiple regexes onto one line using semicolons. The order in which regexes are listed on a line is significant: devices matching the first regex will be rendered first, and subsequent groups will be rendered to the right of those.
+
+# Image Attachments
+
+Certain objects within NetBox (namely sites, racks, and devices) can have photos or other images attached to them. (Note that _only_ image files are supported.) Each attachment may optionally be assigned a name; if omitted, the attachment will be represented by its file name.
+
+!!! note
+    If you experience a server error while attempting to upload an image attachment, verify that the system user NetBox runs as has write permission to the media root directory (`netbox/media/`).

docs/data-model/ipam.md

@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+IP address management (IPAM) entails the allocation of IP networks, addresses, and related numeric resources.
+
+# VRFs
+
+A VRF object in NetBox represents a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) domain within a network. Each VRF is essentially a separate routing table: the same IP prefix or address can exist in multiple VRFs. VRFs are commonly used to isolate customers or organizations from one another within a network.
+
+Each VRF is assigned a name and a unique route distinguisher (RD). VRFs are an optional feature of NetBox: Any IP prefix or address not assigned to a VRF is said to belong to the "global" table.
+
+!!! note
+    By default, NetBox allows for overlapping IP space both in the global table and within each VRF. Unique space enforcement can be toggled per-VRF as well as in the global table using the `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` configuration setting.
+
+---
+
+# Aggregates
+
+IP address space is organized as a hierarchy, with more-specific (smaller) prefixes arranged as child nodes under less-specific (larger) prefixes. For example:
+
+* 10.0.0.0/8
+    * 10.1.0.0/16
+        * 10.1.2.0/24
+
+The root of the IPv4 hierarchy is 0.0.0.0/0, which encompasses all possible IPv4 addresses (and similarly, ::/0 for IPv6). However, even the largest organizations use only a small fraction of the global address space. Therefore, it makes sense to track in NetBox only the address space which is of interest to your organization.
+
+Aggregates serve as arbitrary top-level nodes in the IP space hierarchy. They allow you to easily construct your IP scheme without any clutter of unused address space. For instance, most organizations utilize some portion of the private IPv4 space set aside in RFC 1918. So, you might define three aggregates for this space:
+
+* 10.0.0.0/8
+* 172.16.0.0/12
+* 192.168.0.0/16
+
+Additionally, you might define an aggregate for each large swath of public IPv4 space your organization uses. You'd also create aggregates for both globally routable and unique local IPv6 space. (Most organizations will not have a need to track IPv6 link local space.)
+
+Prefixes you create in NetBox (discussed below) will be automatically organized under their respective aggregates. Any space within an aggregate which is not covered by an existing prefix will be annotated as available for allocation. Total utilization for each aggregate is displayed in the aggregates list.
+
+Aggregates cannot overlap with one another; they can only exist in parallel. For instance, you cannot define both 10.0.0.0/8 and 10.16.0.0/16 as aggregates, because they overlap. 10.16.0.0/16 in this example would be created as a prefix and automatically grouped under 10.0.0.0/8.
+
+### RIRs
+
+Regional Internet Registries (RIRs) are responsible for the allocation of global address space. The five RIRs are ARIN, RIPE, APNIC, LACNIC, and AFRINIC. However, some address space has been set aside for private or internal use only, such as defined in RFCs 1918 and 6598. NetBox considers these RFCs as a sort of RIR as well; that is, an authority which "owns" certain address space.
+
+Each aggregate must be assigned to one RIR. You are free to define whichever RIRs you choose (or create your own). Each RIR can be annotated as representing only private space.
+
+---
+
+# Prefixes
+
+A prefix is an IPv4 or IPv6 network and mask expressed in CIDR notation (e.g. 192.0.2.0/24). A prefix entails only the "network portion" of an IP address; all bits in the address not covered by the mask must be zero.
+
+Each prefix may be assigned to one VRF; prefixes not assigned to a VRF are assigned to the "global" table. Prefixes are also organized under their respective aggregates, irrespective of VRF assignment.
+
+A prefix may optionally be assigned to one VLAN; a VLAN may have multiple prefixes assigned to it. Each prefix may also be assigned a short description.
+
+### Statuses
+
+Each prefix is assigned an operational status. This is one of the following:
+
+* Container - A summary of child prefixes
+* Active - Provisioned and in use
+* Reserved - Designated for future use
+* Deprecated - No longer in use
+
+### Roles
+
+Whereas a status describes a prefix's operational state, a role describes its function. For example, roles might include:
+
+* Access segment
+* Infrastructure
+* NAT
+* Lab
+* Out-of-band
+
+Role assignment is optional and roles are fully customizable.
+
+---
+
+# IP Addresses
+
+An IP address comprises a single address (either IPv4 or IPv6) and its subnet mask. Its mask should match exactly how the IP address is configured on an interface in the real world.
+
+Like prefixes, an IP address can optionally be assigned to a VRF (or it will appear in the "global" table). IP addresses are automatically organized under parent prefixes within their respective VRFs. Each IP address can also be assigned a short description.
+
+An IP address can be assigned to a device's interface; an interface may have multiple IP addresses assigned to it. Further, each device may have one of its interface IPs designated as its primary IP address (for both IPv4 and IPv6).
+
+One IP address can be designated as the network address translation (NAT) IP address for exactly one other IP address. This is useful primarily to denote the public address for a private internal IP. Tracking one-to-many NAT (or PAT) assignments is not supported.
+
+---
+
+# VLANs
+
+A VLAN represents an isolated layer two domain, identified by a name and a numeric ID (1-4094) as defined in [IEEE 802.1Q](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1Q). Each VLAN may be assigned to a site and/or VLAN group. Like prefixes, each VLAN is assigned an operational status and (optionally) a functional role, and may include a short description.
+
+### VLAN Groups
+
+VLAN groups can be employed for administrative organization within NetBox. Each VLAN within a group must have a unique ID and name. VLANs which are not assigned to a group may have overlapping names and IDs, including within a site.
+
+---
+
+# Services
+
+A service represents a TCP or UDP service available on a device or virtual machine. Each service must be defined with a name, protocol, and port number; for example, "SSH (TCP/22)." A service may optionally be bound to one or more specific IP addresses belonging to its parent. (If no IP addresses are bound, the service is assumed to be reachable via any assigned IP address.)

docs/data-model/secrets.md

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+"Secrets" are small amounts of data that must be kept confidential; for example, passwords and SNMP community strings. NetBox provides encrypted storage of secret data.
+
+# Secrets
+
+A secret represents a single credential or other string which must be stored securely. Each secret is assigned to a device within NetBox. The plaintext value of a secret is encrypted to a ciphertext immediately prior to storage within the database using a 256-bit AES master key. A SHA256 hash of the plaintext is also stored along with each ciphertext to validate the decrypted plaintext.
+
+Each secret can also store an optional name parameter, which is not encrypted. This may be useful for storing user names.
+
+### Roles
+
+Each secret is assigned a functional role which indicates what it is used for. Typical roles might include:
+
+* Login credentials
+* SNMP community strings
+* RADIUS/TACACS+ keys
+* IKE key strings
+* Routing protocol shared secrets
+
+Roles are also used to control access to secrets. Each role is assigned an arbitrary number of groups and/or users. Only the users associated with a role have permission to decrypt the secrets assigned to that role. (A superuser has permission to decrypt all secrets, provided they have an active user key.)
+
+---
+
+# User Keys
+
+Each user within NetBox can associate his or her account with an RSA public key. If activated by an administrator, this user key will contain a unique, encrypted copy of the AES master key needed to retrieve secret data.
+
+User keys may be created by users individually, however they are of no use until they have been activated by a user who already possesses an active user key.
+
+## Creating the First User Key
+
+When NetBox is first installed, it contains no encryption keys. Before it can store secrets, a user (typically the superuser) must create a user key. This can be done by navigating to Profile > User Key.
+
+To create a user key, you can either generate a new RSA key pair, or upload the public key belonging to a pair you already have. If generating a new key pair, **you must save the private key** locally before saving your new user key. Once your user key has been created, its public key will be displayed under your profile.
+
+When the first user key is created in NetBox, a random master encryption key is generated automatically. This key is then encrypted using the public key provided and stored as part of your user key. **The master key cannot be recovered** without your private key.
+
+Once a user key has been assigned an encrypted copy of the master key, it is considered activated and can now be used to encrypt and decrypt secrets.
+
+## Creating Additional User Keys
+
+Any user can create his or her user key by generating or uploading a public RSA key. However, a user key cannot be used to encrypt or decrypt secrets until it has been activated with an encrypted copy of the master key.
+
+Only an administrator with an active user key can activate other user keys. To do so, access the NetBox admin UI and navigate to Secrets > User Keys. Select the user key(s) to be activated, and select "activate selected user keys" from the actions dropdown. You will need to provide your private key in order to decrypt the master key. A copy of the master key is then encrypted using the public key associated with the user key being activated.

docs/data-model/tenancy.md

@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+NetBox supports the assignment of resources to tenant organizations. Typically, these are used to represent individual customers of or internal departments within the organization using NetBox.
+
+# Tenants
+
+A tenant represents a discrete organization. The following objects can be assigned to tenants:
+
+* Sites
+* Racks
+* Devices
+* VRFs
+* Prefixes
+* IP addresses
+* VLANs
+* Circuits
+
+If a prefix or IP address is not assigned to a tenant, it will appear to inherit the tenant to which its parent VRF is assigned, if any.
+
+### Tenant Groups
+
+Tenants can be grouped by type. For instance, you might create one group called "Customers" and one called "Acquisitions." The assignment of tenants to groups is optional.

docs/data-model/virtualization.md

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+NetBox supports the definition of virtual machines arranged in clusters. A cluster can optionally have physical host devices associated with it.
+
+# Clusters
+
+A cluster is a logical grouping of physical resources within which virtual machines run. A cluster must be assigned a type, and may optionally be assigned an organizational group.
+
+Physical devices (from NetBox's DCIM component) may be associated with clusters as hosts. This allows users to track on which host(s) a particular VM may reside. However, NetBox does not support pinning a specific VM within a cluster to a particular host device.
+
+### Cluster Types
+
+A cluster type represents a technology or mechanism by which a cluster is formed. For example, you might create a cluster type named "VMware vSphere" for a locally hosted cluster or "DigitalOcean NYC3" for one hosted by a cloud provider.
+
+### Cluster Groups
+
+Cluster groups may be created for the purpose of organizing clusters.
+
+---
+
+# Virtual Machines
+
+A virtual machine represents a virtual compute instance hosted within a cluster. Each VM must be associated with exactly one cluster.
+
+Like devices, each VM can have interfaces created on it. These behave similarly to device interfaces, and can be assigned IP addresses, however given their virtual nature they cannot be connected to other interfaces. VMs can also be assigned layer four services. Unlike physical devices, VMs cannot be assigned console or power ports, or device bays.
+
+The following resources can be defined for each VM:
+
+* vCPU count
+* Memory (MB)
+* Disk space (GB)

docs/development/adding-models.md

@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-# Adding Models
-
-## 1. Define the model class
-
-Models within each app are stored in either `models.py` or within a submodule under the `models/` directory. When creating a model, be sure to subclass the [appropriate base model](models.md) from `netbox.models`. This will typically be NetBoxModel or OrganizationalModel. Remember to add the model class to the `__all__` listing for the module.
-
-Each model should define, at a minimum:
-
-* A `Meta` class specifying a deterministic ordering (if ordered by fields other than the primary ID)
-* A `__str__()` method returning a user-friendly string representation of the instance
-* A `get_absolute_url()` method if necessary; a standard version of the method is defined in the `NetBoxFeatureSet` base class, but you will need to provide your own (returning an instance's direct URL using `reverse()`) if not subclassing that base class
-
-## 2. Define field choices
-
-If the model has one or more fields with static choices, define those choices in `choices.py` by subclassing `utilities.choices.ChoiceSet`.
-
-## 3. Generate database migrations
-
-Once your model definition is complete, generate database migrations by running `manage.py makemigrations -n $NAME --no-header`. Always specify a short unique name when generating migrations.
-
-!!! info "Configuration Required"
-    Set `DEVELOPER = True` in your NetBox configuration to enable the creation of new migrations.
-
-## 4. Add all standard views
-
-Most models will need view classes created in `views.py` to serve the following operations:
-
-* List view
-* Detail view
-* Edit view
-* Delete view
-* Bulk import
-* Bulk edit
-* Bulk delete
-
-## 5. Add URL paths
-
-Add the relevant URL path for each view created in the previous step to `urls.py`.
-
-## 6. Add relevant forms
-
-Depending on the type of model being added, you may need to define several types of form classes. These include:
-
-* A base model form (for creating/editing individual objects)
-* A bulk edit form
-* A bulk import form (for CSV-based import)
-* A filterset form (for filtering the object list view)
-
-## 7. Create the FilterSet
-
-Each model should have a corresponding FilterSet class defined. This is used to filter UI and API queries. Subclass the appropriate class from `netbox.filtersets` that matches the model's parent class.
-
-## 8. Create the table class
-
-Create a table class for the model in `tables.py` by subclassing `utilities.tables.BaseTable`. Under the table's `Meta` class, be sure to list both the fields and default columns.
-
-## 9. Create a SearchIndex subclass
-
-If this model will be included in global search results, create a subclass of `netbox.search.SearchIndex` for it and specify the fields to be indexed.
-
-## 10. Create the object template
-
-Create the HTML template for the object view. (The other views each typically employ a generic template.) This template should extend `generic/object.html`.
-
-## 11. Add the model to the navigation menu
-
-Add the relevant navigation menu items in `netbox/netbox/navigation/menu.py`.
-
-## 12. REST API components
-
-Create the following for each model:
-
-* Detailed (full) model serializer in `api/serializers.py`
-* API view in `api/views.py`
-* Endpoint route in `api/urls.py`
-
-## 13. GraphQL API components
-
-Create the following for each model:
-
-* GraphQL object type for the model in `graphql/types.py` (subclass the appropriate class from `netbox.graphql.types`)
-* Add a GraphQL filter for the model in `graphql/filters.py`
-* Extend the query class for the app in `graphql/schema.py` with the individual object and object list fields
-
-**Note:** GraphQL unit tests may fail citing null values on a non-nullable field if related objects are prefetched. You may need to fix this by setting the type annotation to be `= strawberry_django.field(select_related=["foo"])` or similar.
-
-## 14. Add tests
-
-Add tests for the following:
-
-* UI views
-* API views
-* Filter sets
-
-## 15. Documentation
-
-Create a new documentation page for the model in `docs/models/<app_label>/<model_name>.md`. Include this file under the "features" documentation where appropriate.
-
-Also add your model to the index in `docs/development/models.md`.

docs/development/application-registry.md

@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-# Application Registry
-
-The registry is an in-memory data structure which houses various application-wide parameters, such as the list of enabled plugins. It is not exposed to the user and is not intended to be modified by any code outside of NetBox core.
-
-The registry behaves essentially like a Python dictionary, with the notable exception that once a store (key) has been declared, it cannot be deleted or overwritten. The value of a store can, however, be modified; e.g. by appending a value to a list. Store values generally do not change once the application has been initialized.
-
-The registry can be inspected by importing `registry` from `extras.registry`.
-
-## Stores
-
-### `counter_fields`
-
-A dictionary mapping of models to foreign keys with which cached counter fields are associated.
-
-### `data_backends`
-
-A dictionary mapping data backend types to their respective classes. These are used to interact with [remote data sources](../models/core/datasource.md).
-
-### `denormalized_fields`
-
-Stores registration made using `netbox.denormalized.register()`. For each model, a list of related models and their field mappings is maintained to facilitate automatic updates.
-
-### `model_features`
-
-A dictionary of model features (e.g. custom fields, tags, etc.) mapped to the functions used to qualify a model as supporting each feature. Model features are registered using the `register_model_feature()` function in `netbox.utils`.
-
-Core model features are listed in the [features matrix](./models.md#features-matrix).
-
-### `models`
-
-This key lists all models which have been registered in NetBox which are not designated for private use. (Setting `_netbox_private` to True on a model excludes it from this list.) As with individual features under `model_features`, models are organized by app label.
-
-### `plugins`
-
-This store maintains all registered items for plugins, such as navigation menus, template extensions, etc.
-
-### `request_processors`
-
-A list of context managers to invoke when processing a request e.g. in middleware or when executing a background job. Request processors can be registered with the `@register_request_processor` decorator.
-
-### `search`
-
-A dictionary mapping each model (identified by its app and label) to its search index class, if one has been registered for it.
-
-### `tables`
-
-A dictionary mapping table classes to lists of extra columns that have been registered by plugins using the `register_table_column()` utility function. Each column is defined as a tuple of name and column instance.
-
-### `views`
-
-A hierarchical mapping of registered views for each model. Mappings are added using the `register_model_view()` decorator, and URLs paths can be generated from these using `get_model_urls()`.

docs/development/extending-models.md

@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-# Extending Models
-
-Below is a list of tasks to consider when adding a new field to a core model.
-
-## 1. Add the field to the model class
-
-Add the field to the model, taking care to address any of the following conditions.
-
-* When adding a GenericForeignKey field, you may need add an index under `Meta` for its two concrete fields. (This is required only for non-unique GFK relationships, as the unique constraint introduces its own index.) For example:
-
-    ```python
-    class Meta:
-        indexes = (
-            models.Index(fields=('object_type', 'object_id')),
-        )
-    ```
-
-## 2. Generate and run database migrations
-
-[Django migrations](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/migrations/) are used to express changes to the database schema. In most cases, Django can generate these automatically, however very complex changes may require manual intervention. Always remember to specify a short but descriptive name when generating a new migration.
-
-```
-./manage.py makemigrations <app> -n <name> --no-header
-./manage.py migrate
-```
-
-Where possible, try to merge related changes into a single migration. For example, if three new fields are being added to different models within an app, these can be expressed in a single migration. You can merge a newly generated migration with an existing one by combining their `operations` lists.
-
-!!! warning "Do not alter existing migrations"
-    Migrations can only be merged within a release. Once a new release has been published, its migrations cannot be altered (other than for the purpose of correcting a bug).
-
-## 3. Add validation logic to `clean()`
-
-If the new field introduces additional validation requirements (beyond what's included with the field itself), implement them in the model's `clean()` method. Remember to call the model's original method using `super()` before or after your custom validation as appropriate:
-
-```
-class Foo(models.Model):
-
-    def clean(self):
-        super().clean()
-
-        # Custom validation goes here
-        if self.bar is None:
-            raise ValidationError()
-```
-
-## 4. Update relevant querysets
-
-If you're adding a relational field (e.g. `ForeignKey`) and intend to include the data when retrieving a list of objects, be sure to include the field using `prefetch_related()` as appropriate. This will optimize the view and avoid extraneous database queries.
-
-## 5. Update API serializer
-
-Extend the model's API serializer in `<app>.api.serializers` to include the new field.
-
-## 6. Add fields to forms
-
-Extend any forms to include the new field(s) as appropriate. These are found under the `forms/` directory within each app. Common forms include:
-
-* **Credit/edit** - Manipulating a single object
-* **Bulk edit** - Performing a change on many objects at once
-* **CSV import** - The form used when bulk importing objects in CSV format
-* **Filter** - Displays the options available for filtering a list of objects (both UI and API)
-
-## 7. Extend object filter set
-
-If the new field should be filterable, add it to the `FilterSet` for the model. If the field should be searchable, remember to query it in the FilterSet's `search()` method.
-
-## 8. Add column to object table
-
-If the new field will be included in the object list view, add a column to the model's table. For simple fields, adding the field name to `Meta.fields` will be sufficient. More complex fields may require declaring a custom column. Also add the field name to `default_columns` if the column should be present in the table by default.
-
-## 9. Update the SearchIndex
-
-Where applicable, add the new field to the model's SearchIndex for inclusion in global search.
-
-## 10. Update the UI templates
-
-Edit the object's view template to display the new field. There may also be a custom add/edit form template that needs to be updated.
-
-## 11. Create/extend test cases
-
-Create or extend the relevant test cases to verify that the new field and any accompanying validation logic perform as expected. This is especially important for relational fields. NetBox incorporates various test suites, including:
-
-* API serializer/view tests
-* Filter tests
-* Form tests
-* Model tests
-* View tests
-
-Be diligent to ensure all the relevant test suites are adapted or extended as necessary to test any new functionality.
-
-## 12. Update the model's documentation
-
-Each model has a dedicated page in the documentation, at `models/<app>/<model>.md`. Update this file to include any relevant information about the new field.

docs/development/getting-started.md

@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-# Getting Started
-
-## Setting up a Development Environment
-
-Getting started with NetBox development is pretty straightforward, and should feel very familiar to anyone with Django development experience. There are a few things you'll need:
-
-* A Linux system or compatible environment
-* A PostgreSQL server, which can be installed locally [per the documentation](../installation/1-postgresql.md)
-* A Redis server, which can also be [installed locally](../installation/2-redis.md)
-* Python 3.10 or later
-
-### 1. Fork the Repo
-
-Assuming you'll be working on your own fork, your first step will be to fork the [official git repository](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox). (If you're a maintainer who's going to be working directly with the official repo, skip this step.) Click the "fork" button at top right (be sure that you've logged into GitHub first).
-
-![GitHub fork button](../media/development/github_fork_button.png)
-
-Copy the URL provided in the dialog box.
-
-![GitHub fork dialog](../media/development/github_fork_dialog.png)
-
-You can then clone your GitHub fork locally for development:
-
-```no-highlight hl_lines="1 9"
-$ git clone https://github.com/$username/netbox.git
-Cloning into 'netbox'...
-remote: Enumerating objects: 85949, done.
-remote: Counting objects: 100% (4672/4672), done.
-remote: Compressing objects: 100% (1224/1224), done.
-remote: Total 85949 (delta 3538), reused 4332 (delta 3438), pack-reused 81277
-Receiving objects: 100% (85949/85949), 55.16 MiB | 44.90 MiB/s, done.
-Resolving deltas: 100% (68008/68008), done.
-$ ls netbox/
-base_requirements.txt  contrib          docs         mkdocs.yml  NOTICE     requirements.txt  upgrade.sh
-CHANGELOG.md           CONTRIBUTING.md  LICENSE.txt  netbox      README.md  scripts
-```
-
-### 2. Create a New Branch
-
-The NetBox project utilizes two persistent git branches to track work:
-
-* `main` - All development on the upcoming stable (patch) release occurs here. Releases are published from this branch.
-* `feature` - All work planned for the upcoming minor release is done here.
-
-Typically, you'll base pull requests off of the `main` branch, or off of `feature` if you're working on the upcoming minor or major release. For example, assume that the current NetBox release is v4.2.3. Work applied to the `main` branch will appear in v4.2.4, and work done under the `feature` branch will be included in the next minor release (v4.3.0).
-
-To create a new branch, first ensure that you've checked out the desired base branch, then run:
-
-```no-highlight
-git checkout -B $branchname
-```
-
-When naming a new git branch, contributors are strongly encouraged to use the relevant issue number followed by a very brief description of the work:
-
-```no-highlight
-$issue-$description
-```
-
-The description should be just two or three words to imply the focus of the work being performed. For example, bug #1234 to fix a TypeError exception when creating a device might be named `1234-device-typerror`. This ensures that branches are always follow some logical ordering (e.g. when running `git branch -a`) and helps other developers quickly identify the purpose of each.
-
-### 3. Create a Python Virtual Environment
-
-A [virtual environment](https://docs.python.org/3/tutorial/venv.html) (or "venv" for short) is like a container for a set of Python packages. These allow you to build environments suited to specific projects without interfering with system packages or other projects. When installed per the documentation, NetBox uses a virtual environment in production.
-
-Create a virtual environment using the `venv` Python module:
-
-```no-highlight
-mkdir ~/.venv
-python3 -m venv ~/.venv/netbox
-```
-
-This will create a directory named `.venv/netbox/` in your home directory, which houses a virtual copy of the Python executable and its related libraries and tooling. When running NetBox for development, it will be run using the Python binary at `~/.venv/netbox/bin/python`.
-
-!!! tip "Virtual Environments"
-    Keeping virtual environments in `~/.venv/` is a common convention but entirely optional: Virtual environments can be created almost wherever you please. Also consider using [`virtualenvwrapper`](https://virtualenvwrapper.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) to simplify the management of multiple environments.
-
-Once created, activate the virtual environment:
-
-```no-highlight
-source ~/.venv/netbox/bin/activate
-```
-
-Notice that the console prompt changes to indicate the active environment. This updates the necessary system environment variables to ensure that any Python scripts are run within the virtual environment.
-
-### 4. Install Required Packages
-
-With the virtual environment activated, install the project's required Python packages using the `pip` module. Required packages are defined in `requirements.txt`. Each line in this file specifies the name and specific version of a required package.
-
-```no-highlight
-python -m pip install -r requirements.txt
-```
-
-### 5. Install Pre-Commit
-
-NetBox uses [`pre-commit`](https://pre-commit.com/) to automatically validate code when commiting new changes. This includes the following operations:
-
-* Run the `ruff` Python linter
-* Run Django's internal system check
-* Check for missing database migrations
-* Validate any changes to the documentation with `mkdocs`
-* Validate Typescript & Sass styling with `yarn`
-* Ensure that any modified static front end assets have been recompiled
-
-Enable `pre-commit` with the following commands _prior_ to commiting any changes:
-
-```no-highlight
-python -m pip install ruff pre-commit
-pre-commit install
-```
-
-You may also need to set up the yarn packages as shown in the [Web UI Development Guide](web-ui.md).
-
-### 6. Configure NetBox
-
-Within the `netbox/netbox/` directory, copy `configuration_example.py` to `configuration.py` and update the following parameters:
-
-* `ALLOWED_HOSTS`: This can be set to `['*']` for development purposes
-* `DATABASES`: PostgreSQL database connection parameters
-* `REDIS`: Redis configuration (if different from the defaults)
-* `SECRET_KEY`: Set to a random string (use `generate_secret_key.py` in the parent directory to generate a suitable key)
-* `DEBUG`: Set to `True`
-* `DEVELOPER`: Set to `True` (this enables the creation of new database migrations)
-
-### 7. Start the Development Server
-
-Django provides a lightweight, auto-updating [HTTP/WSGI server](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/django-admin/#runserver) for development use. It is started with the `runserver` management command:
-
-```no-highlight hl_lines="1"
-$ ./manage.py runserver
-Performing system checks...
-
-System check identified no issues (0 silenced).
-August 18, 2022 - 15:17:52
-Django version 4.0.7, using settings 'netbox.settings'
-Starting development server at http://127.0.0.1:8000/
-Quit the server with CONTROL-C.
-```
-
-This ensures that your development environment is now complete and operational. The development server will monitor the development environment and automatically reload in response to any changes made.
-
-!!! tip "IDE Integration"
-    Some IDEs, such as the highly-recommended [PyCharm](https://www.jetbrains.com/pycharm/), will integrate with Django's development server and allow you to run it directly within the IDE. This is strongly encouraged as it makes for a much more convenient development environment.
-
-## UI Development
-
-For UI development you will need to review the [Web UI Development Guide](web-ui.md)
-
-## Populating Demo Data
-
-Once you have your development environment up and running, it might be helpful to populate some "dummy" data to make interacting with the UI and APIs more convenient. Check out the [netbox-demo-data](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-demo-data) repo on GitHub, which houses a collection of sample data that can be easily imported to any new NetBox deployment. This sample data is used to populate the [public demo instance](https://demo.netbox.dev).
-
-The demo data is provided in JSON format and loaded into an empty database using Django's `loaddata` management command. Consult the demo data repo's `README` file for complete instructions on populating the data.
-
-## Running Tests
-
-Prior to committing any substantial changes to the code base, be sure to run NetBox's test suite to catch potential errors. Tests are run using the `test` management command, which employs Python's [`unittest`](https://docs.python.org/3/library/unittest.html#module-unittest) library. Remember to ensure that the Python virtual environment is active before running this command. Also keep in mind that these commands are executed in the `netbox/` directory, not the root directory of the repository.
-
-To avoid potential issues with your local configuration file, set the `NETBOX_CONFIGURATION` to point to the packaged test configuration at `netbox/configuration_testing.py`. This will handle things like ensuring that the dummy plugin is enabled for comprehensive testing.
-
-```no-highlight
-export NETBOX_CONFIGURATION=netbox.configuration_testing
-cd netbox/
-python manage.py test
-```
-
-In cases where you haven't made any changes to the database schema (which is typical), you can append the `--keepdb` argument to this command to reuse the test database between runs. This cuts down on the time it takes to run the test suite since the database doesn't have to be rebuilt each time. (Note that this argument will cause errors if you've modified any model fields since the previous test run.)
-
-```no-highlight
-python manage.py test --keepdb
-```
-
-You can also reduce testing time by enabling parallel test execution with the `--parallel` flag. (By default, this will run as many parallel tests as you have processors. To avoid sluggishness, it's a good idea to specify a lower number of parallel tests.) This flag can be combined with `--keepdb`, although if you encounter any strange errors, try running the test suite again with parallelization disabled.
-
-```no-highlight
-python manage.py test --parallel <n>
-```
-
-Finally, it's possible to limit the run to a specific set of tests, specified by their Python path. For example, to run only IPAM and DCIM view tests:
-
-```no-highlight
-python manage.py test dcim.tests.test_views ipam.tests.test_views
-```
-
-This is handy for instances where just a few tests are failing and you want to re-run them individually.
-
-!!! info
-    NetBox uses [django-rich](https://github.com/adamchainz/django-rich) to enhance Django's default `test` management command.
-
-## Submitting Pull Requests
-
-Once you're happy with your work and have verified that all tests pass, commit your changes and push it upstream to your fork. Always provide descriptive (but not excessively verbose) commit messages. Be sure to prefix your commit message with the word "Fixes" or "Closes" and the relevant issue number (with a hash mark). This tells GitHub to automatically close the referenced issue once the commit has been merged.
-
-```no-highlight
-git commit -m "Closes #1234: Add IPv5 support"
-git push origin
-```
-
-Once your fork has the new commit, submit a [pull request](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/compare) to the NetBox repo to propose the changes. Be sure to provide a detailed accounting of the changes being made and the reasons for doing so.
-
-Once submitted, a maintainer will review your pull request and either merge it or request changes. If changes are needed, you can make them via new commits to your fork: The pull request will update automatically.
-
-!!! warning
-    Remember, pull requests are permitted only for **accepted** issues. If an issue you want to work on hasn't been approved by a maintainer yet, it's best to avoid risking your time and effort on a change that might not be accepted. (The one exception to this is trivial changes to the documentation or other non-critical resources.)

docs/development/git-cheat-sheet.md

@@ -1,388 +0,0 @@
-# git Cheat Sheet
-
-This cheat sheet serves as a convenient reference for NetBox contributors who already somewhat familiar with using git. For a general introduction to the tooling and workflows involved, please see GitHub's guide [Getting started with git](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/getting-started-with-git/setting-your-username-in-git).
-
-## Common Operations
-
-### Clone a Repo
-
-This copies a remote git repository (e.g. from GitHub) to your local workstation. It will create a new directory bearing the repo's name in the current path.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git clone https://github.com/$org-name/$repo-name
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git clone https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
-Cloning into 'netbox'...
-remote: Enumerating objects: 95112, done.
-remote: Counting objects: 100% (682/682), done.
-remote: Compressing objects: 100% (246/246), done.
-remote: Total 95112 (delta 448), reused 637 (delta 436), pack-reused 94430
-Receiving objects: 100% (95112/95112), 60.40 MiB | 45.82 MiB/s, done.
-Resolving deltas: 100% (74979/74979), done.
-```
-
-### Pull New Commits
-
-To update your local branch with any recent upstream commits, run `git pull`.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git pull
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git pull
-remote: Enumerating objects: 1, done.
-remote: Counting objects: 100% (1/1), done.
-remote: Total 1 (delta 0), reused 0 (delta 0), pack-reused 0
-Unpacking objects: 100% (1/1), done.
-From https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
-   28bc76695..e0741cc9a  develop    -> origin/develop
-Updating 28bc76695..e0741cc9a
-Fast-forward
- docs/release-notes/version-3.3.md | 1 +
- netbox/netbox/settings.py         | 1 +
- 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+)
-```
-
-### List Branches
-
-`git branch` lists all local branches. Appending `-a` to this command will list both local (green) and remote (red) branches.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git branch -a
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git branch -a
-* develop
-  remotes/origin/10170-changelog
-  remotes/origin/HEAD -> origin/develop
-  remotes/origin/develop
-  remotes/origin/feature
-  remotes/origin/master
-```
-
-### Switch Branches
-
-To switch to a different branch, use the `checkout` command.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git checkout $branchname
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git checkout feature
-Branch 'feature' set up to track remote branch 'feature' from 'origin'.
-Switched to a new branch 'feature'
-```
-
-### Create a New Branch
-
-Use the `-b` argument with `checkout` to create a new _local_ branch from the current branch.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git checkout -b $newbranch
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git checkout -b 123-fix-foo
-Switched to a new branch '123-fix-foo'
-```
-
-### Rename a Branch
-
-To rename the current branch, use the `git branch` command with the `-m` argument (for "modify").
-
-``` title="Command"
-git branch -m $newname
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git branch -m jstretch-testing
-$ git branch
-  develop
-  feature
-* jstretch-testing
-```
-
-### Merge a Branch
-
-To merge one branch into another, use the `git merge` command. Start by checking out the _destination_ branch, and merge the _source_ branch into it.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git merge $sourcebranch
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git checkout testing 
-Switched to branch 'testing'
-Your branch is up to date with 'origin/testing'.
-$ git merge branch2 
-Updating 9a12b5b5f..8ee42390b
-Fast-forward
- newfile.py | 0
- 1 file changed, 0 insertions(+), 0 deletions(-)
- create mode 100644 newfile.py
-```
-
-!!! warning "Avoid Merging Remote Branches"
-    You generally want to avoid merging branches that exist on the remote (upstream) repository, namely `main` and `feature`: Merges into these branches should be done via a pull request on GitHub. Only merge branches when it is necessary to consolidate work you've done locally.
-
-### Show Pending Changes
-
-After making changes to files in the repo, `git status` will display a summary of created, modified, and deleted files.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git status
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git status
-On branch 123-fix-foo
-Changes not staged for commit:
-  (use "git add <file>..." to update what will be committed)
-  (use "git checkout -- <file>..." to discard changes in working directory)
-
-	modified:   README.md
-
-Untracked files:
-  (use "git add <file>..." to include in what will be committed)
-
-	foo.py
-
-no changes added to commit (use "git add" and/or "git commit -a")
-```
-
-### Stage Changed Files
-
-Before creating a new commit, modified files must be staged. This is typically done with the `git add` command. You can specify a particular path, or just append `-A` to automatically staged _all_ changed files within the current directory. Run `git status` again to verify what files have been staged.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git add -A
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git add -A
-$ git status
-On branch 123-fix-foo
-Changes to be committed:
-  (use "git reset HEAD <file>..." to unstage)
-
-	modified:   README.md
-	new file:   foo.py
-
-```
-
-### Review Staged Files
-
-It's a good idea to thoroughly review all staged changes immediately prior to creating a new commit. This can be done using the `git diff` command. Appending the `--staged` argument will show staged changes; omitting it will show changes that have not yet been staged.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git diff --staged
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git diff --staged
-diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
-index 93e125079..4344fb514 100644
---- a/README.md
-+++ b/README.md
-@@ -1,3 +1,8 @@
-+
-+Added some lines here
-+and here
-+and here too
-+
- <div align="center">
-   <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/netbox-community/netbox/main/docs/netbox_logo.svg" width="400" alt="NetBox logo" />
- </div>
-diff --git a/foo.py b/foo.py
-new file mode 100644
-index 000000000..e69de29bb
-```
-
-### Create a New Commit
-
-The `git commit` command records your changes to the current branch. Specify a commit message with the `-m` argument. (If omitted, a file editor will be opened to provide a message.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git commit -m "Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken"
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git commit -m "Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken"
-[123-fix-foo 9a12b5b5f] Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken
- 2 files changed, 5 insertions(+)
- create mode 100644 foo.py
-```
-
-!!! tip "Automatically Closing Issues"
-    GitHub will [automatically close](https://github.blog/2013-01-22-closing-issues-via-commit-messages/) any issues referenced in a commit message by `Fixes:` or `Closes:` when the commit is merged into the repository's default branch. Contributors are strongly encouraged to follow this convention when forming commit messages. (Use "Closes" for feature requests and "Fixes" for bugs.)
-
-### Push a Commit Upstream
-
-Once you've made a commit locally, it needs to be pushed upstream to the _remote_ repository (typically called "origin"). This is done with the `git push` command. If this is a new branch that doesn't yet exist on the remote repository, you'll need to set the upstream for it when pushing.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git push -u origin $branchname
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git push -u origin testing
-Counting objects: 3, done.
-Delta compression using up to 16 threads.
-Compressing objects: 100% (3/3), done.
-Writing objects: 100% (3/3), 377 bytes | 377.00 KiB/s, done.
-Total 3 (delta 2), reused 0 (delta 0)
-remote: Resolving deltas: 100% (2/2), completed with 2 local objects.
-remote: 
-remote: Create a pull request for 'testing' on GitHub by visiting:
-remote:      https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/pull/new/testing
-remote: 
-To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
- * [new branch]          testing -> testing
-Branch 'testing' set up to track remote branch 'testing' from 'origin'.
-```
-
-!!! tip
-    You can apply the following git configuration to automatically set the upstream for all new branches. This obviates the need to specify `-u origin`.
-    
-    ```
-    git config --global push.default current
-    ```
-
-## The GitHub CLI Client
-
-GitHub provides a [free CLI client](https://cli.github.com/) to simplify many aspects of interacting with GitHub repositories. Note that this utility is separate from `git`, and must be [installed separately](https://github.com/cli/cli#installation).
-
-This guide provides some examples of common operations, but be sure to check out the [GitHub CLI manual](https://cli.github.com/manual/) for a complete accounting of available commands.
-
-### List Open Pull Requests
-
-``` title="Command"
-gh pr list
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ gh pr list
-
-Showing 3 of 3 open pull requests in netbox-community/netbox
-
-#10223  #7503 API Bulk-Create of Devices does not check Rack-Space  7503-bulkdevice             about 17 hours ago
-#9716   Closes #9599: Add cursor pagination mode                    lyuyangh:cursor-pagination  about 1 month ago
-#9498   Adds replication and adoption for module import             sleepinggenius2:issue_9361  about 2 months ago
-```
-
-### Check Out a PR
-
-This command will automatically check out the remote branch associated with an open pull request.
-
-``` title="Command"
-gh pr checkout $number
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ gh pr checkout 10223
-Branch '7503-bulkdevice' set up to track remote branch '7503-bulkdevice' from 'origin'.
-Switched to a new branch '7503-bulkdevice'
-```
-
-## Fixing Mistakes
-
-### Modify the Previous Commit
-
-Sometimes you'll find that you've overlooked a necessary change and need to commit again. If you haven't pushed your most recent commit and just need to make a small tweak or two, you can _amend_ your most recent commit instead of creating a new one.
-
-First, stage the desired files with `git add` and verify the changes, the issue the `git commit` command with the `--amend` argument. You can also append the `--no-edit` argument if you would like to keep the previous commit message.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git commit --amend --no-edit
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git add -A
-$ git diff --staged
-$ git commit --amend --no-edit
-[testing 239b16921] Added a new file
- Date: Fri Aug 26 16:30:05 2022 -0400
- 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+)
- create mode 100644 newfile.py
-```
-
-!!! danger "Don't Amend After Pushing"
-    Never amend a commit you've already pushed upstream unless you're **certain** no one else is working on the same branch. Force-pushing will overwrite the change history, which will break any commits from other contributors. When in doubt, create a new commit instead.
-
-### Undo the Last Commit
-
-The `git reset` command can be used to undo the most recent commit. (`HEAD~` is equivalent to `HEAD~1` and references the commit prior to the current HEAD.) After making and staging your changes, commit using `-c ORIG_HEAD` to replace the erroneous commit.
-
-``` title="Command"
-git reset HEAD~
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git add -A
-$ git commit -m "Erroneous commit"
-[testing 09ce06736] Erroneous commit
- Date: Mon Aug 29 15:20:04 2022 -0400
- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
- create mode 100644 BADCHANGE
-$ git reset HEAD~
-$ rm BADFILE
-$ git add -A
-$ git commit -m "Fixed commit"
-[testing c585709f3] Fixed commit
- Date: Mon Aug 29 15:22:38 2022 -0400
- 1 file changed, 65 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-)
-```
-
-!!! danger "Don't Reset After Pushing"
-    Resetting only works until you've pushed your local changes upstream. If you've already pushed upstream, use `git revert` instead. This will create a _new_ commit that reverts the erroneous one, but ensures that the git history remains intact.
-
-### Rebase from Upstream
-
-If a change has been pushed to the upstream branch since you most recently pulled it, attempting to push a new local commit will fail:
-
-```
-$ git push
-To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git
- ! [rejected]            develop -> develop (fetch first)
-error: failed to push some refs to 'https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git'
-hint: Updates were rejected because the remote contains work that you do
-hint: not have locally. This is usually caused by another repository pushing
-hint: to the same ref. You may want to first integrate the remote changes
-hint: (e.g., 'git pull ...') before pushing again.
-hint: See the 'Note about fast-forwards' in 'git push --help' for details.
-```
-
-To resolve this, first fetch the upstream branch to update your local copy, and then [rebase](https://git-scm.com/book/en/v2/Git-Branching-Rebasing) your local branch to include the new changes. Once the rebase has completed, you can push your local commits upstream.
-
-``` title="Commands"
-git fetch
-git rebase origin/$branchname
-```
-
-``` title="Example"
-$ git fetch
-remote: Enumerating objects: 1, done.
-remote: Counting objects: 100% (1/1), done.
-remote: Total 1 (delta 0), reused 0 (delta 0), pack-reused 0
-Unpacking objects: 100% (1/1), done.
-From https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
-   815b2d8a2..8c35ebbb7  develop    -> origin/develop
-$ git rebase origin/develop
-First, rewinding head to replay your work on top of it...
-Applying: Further tweaks to the PR template
-Applying: Changelog for #10176, #10217
-$ git push
-Counting objects: 9, done.
-Delta compression using up to 16 threads.
-Compressing objects: 100% (9/9), done.
-Writing objects: 100% (9/9), 1.02 KiB | 1.02 MiB/s, done.
-Total 9 (delta 6), reused 0 (delta 0)
-remote: Resolving deltas: 100% (6/6), completed with 5 local objects.
-To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git
-   8c35ebbb7..ada745324  develop -> develop
-```

docs/development/index.md

@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-# NetBox Development
-
-Thanks for your interest in contributing to NetBox! This introduction covers a few important things to know before you get started.
-
-## The Code
-
-NetBox and many of its related projects are maintained on [GitHub](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox). GitHub also serves as one of our primary discussion forums. While all the code and discussion is publicly accessible, you'll need register for a [free GitHub account](https://github.com/signup) to engage in participation. Most people begin by [forking](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/quickstart/fork-a-repo) the NetBox repository under their own GitHub account to begin working on the code.
-
-![GitHub](../media/development/github.png)
-
-There are two permanent branches in the repository:
-
-* `main` - Active development for the upcoming patch release. Pull requests will typically be based on this branch unless they introduce breaking changes that must be deferred until the next minor release.
-* `feature` - New feature work to be introduced in the next minor release (e.g. from v4.2 to v4.3).
-
-NetBox components are arranged into Django apps. Each app holds the models, views, and other resources relevant to a particular function:
-
-* `circuits`: Communications circuits and providers (not to be confused with power circuits)
-* `dcim`: Datacenter infrastructure management (sites, racks, and devices)
-* `extras`: Additional features not considered part of the core data model
-* `ipam`: IP address management (VRFs, prefixes, IP addresses, and VLANs)
-* `tenancy`: Tenants (such as customers) to which NetBox objects may be assigned
-* `users`: Authentication and user preferences
-* `utilities`: Resources which are not user-facing (extendable classes, etc.)
-* `virtualization`: Virtual machines and clusters
-* `wireless`: Wireless links and LANs
-
-All core functionality is stored within the `netbox/` subdirectory. HTML templates are stored in a common `templates/` directory, with model- and view-specific templates arranged by app. Documentation is kept in the `docs/` root directory.
-
-## Proposing Changes
-
-All substantial changes made to the code base are tracked using [GitHub issues](https://docs.github.com/en/issues). Feature requests, bug reports, and similar proposals must all be filed as issues and approved by a maintainer before work begins. This ensures that all changes to the code base are properly documented for future reference.
-
-To submit a new feature request or bug report for NetBox, select and complete the appropriate [issue template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new/choose). Once your issue has been approved, you're welcome to submit a [pull request](https://docs.github.com/en/pull-requests) containing your proposed changes.
-
-![Opening a new GitHub issue](../media/development/github_new_issue.png)
-
-Check out our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy) for an overview of the issue triage and approval processes.
-
-!!! tip
-    Avoid starting work on a proposal before it has been accepted. Not all proposed changes will be accepted, and we'd hate for you to waste time working on code that might not make it into the project.
-
-## Getting Help
-
-There are two primary forums for getting assistance with NetBox development:
-
-* [GitHub discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) - The preferred forum for general discussion and support issues. Ideal for shaping a feature requests prior to submitting an issue.
-* [#netbox on NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/) - Good for quick chats. Avoid any discussion that might need to be referenced later on, as the chat history is not retained indefinitely.
-
-!!! note
-    Don't use GitHub issues to ask for help: These are reserved for proposed code changes only.
-
-## Governance
-
-NetBox follows the [benevolent dictator](http://oss-watch.ac.uk/resources/benevolentdictatorgovernancemodel) model of governance, with [Jeremy Stretch](https://github.com/jeremystretch) ultimately responsible for all changes to the code base. While community contributions are welcomed and encouraged, the lead maintainer's primary role is to ensure the project's long-term maintainability and continued focus on its primary functions.
-
-## Licensing
-
-The entire NetBox project is licensed as open source under the [Apache 2.0 license](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/LICENSE.txt). This is a very permissive license which allows unlimited redistribution of all code within the project. Note that all submissions to the project are subject to the same license.

docs/development/internationalization.md

@@ -1,124 +0,0 @@
-# Internationalization
-
-Beginning with NetBox v4.0, NetBox will leverage [Django's automatic translation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/) to support languages other than English. This page details the areas of the project which require special attention to ensure functioning translation support. Briefly, these include:
-
-* The `verbose_name` and `verbose_name_plural` Meta attributes for each model
-* The `verbose_name` and (if defined) `help_text` for each model field
-* The `label` for each form field
-* Headers for `fieldsets` on each form class
-* The `verbose_name` for each table column
-* All human-readable strings within templates must be wrapped with `{% trans %}` or `{% blocktrans %}`
-
-The rest of this document elaborates on each of the items above.
-
-## General Guidance
-
-* Wrap human-readable strings with Django's `gettext()` or `gettext_lazy()` utility functions to enable automatic translation. Generally, `gettext_lazy()` is preferred (and sometimes required) to defer translation until the string is displayed.
-
-* By convention, the preferred translation function is typically imported as an underscore (`_`) to minimize boilerplate code. Thus, you will often see translation as e.g. `_("Some text")`. It is still an option to import and use alternative translation functions (e.g. `pgettext()` and `ngettext()`) normally as needed.
-
-* Avoid passing markup and other non-natural language where possible. Everything wrapped by a translation function gets exported to a messages file for translation by a human.
-
-* Where the intended meaning of the translated string may not be obvious, use `pgettext()` or `pgettext_lazy()` to include assisting context for the translator. For example:
-
-    ```python
-    # Context, string
-    pgettext("month name", "May")
-    ```
-
-* **Format strings do not support translation.** Avoid "f" strings for messages that must support translation. Instead, use `format()` to accomplish variable replacement:
-
-    ```python
-    # Translation will not work
-    f"There are {count} objects"
-    
-    # Do this instead
-    "There are {count} objects".format(count=count)
-    ```
-
-## Models
-
-1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
-2. Ensure both `verbose_name` and `verbose_name_plural` are defined under the model's `Meta` class and wrapped with the `gettext_lazy()` shortcut.
-3. Ensure each model field specifies a `verbose_name` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
-4. Ensure any `help_text` attributes on model fields are also wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
-
-```python
-from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
-
-class Circuit(PrimaryModel):
-    commit_rate = models.PositiveIntegerField(
-        ...
-        verbose_name=_('commit rate (Kbps)'),
-        help_text=_("Committed rate")
-    )
-
-    class Meta:
-        verbose_name = _('circuit')
-        verbose_name_plural = _('circuits')
-```
-
-## Forms
-
-1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
-2. All form fields must specify a `label` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
-3. The name of each FieldSet on a form must be wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
-
-```python
-from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
-from utilities.forms.rendering import FieldSet
-
-class CircuitBulkEditForm(NetBoxModelBulkEditForm):
-    description = forms.CharField(
-        label=_('Description'),
-        ...
-    )
-
-    fieldsets = (
-        FieldSet('provider', 'type', 'status', 'description', name=_('Circuit')),
-    )
-```
-
-## Tables
-
-1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
-2. All table columns must specify a `verbose_name` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
-
-```python
-from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
-
-class CircuitTable(TenancyColumnsMixin, ContactsColumnMixin, NetBoxTable):
-    provider = tables.Column(
-        verbose_name=_('Provider'),
-        ...
-    )
-```
-
-## Templates
-
-1. Ensure translation support is enabled by including `{% load i18n %}` at the top of the template.
-2. Use the [`{% trans %}`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/#translate-template-tag) tag (short for "translate") to wrap short strings.
-3. Longer strings may be enclosed between [`{% blocktrans %}`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/#blocktranslate-template-tag) and `{% endblocktrans %}` tags to improve readability and to enable variable replacement. (Remember to include the `trimmed` argument to trim whitespace between the tags.)
-4. Avoid passing HTML within translated strings where possible, as this can complicate the work needed of human translators to develop message maps.
-
-```
-{% load i18n %}
-
-{# A short string #}
-<h5 class="card-header">{% trans "Circuit List" %}</h5>
-
-{# A longer string with a context variable #}
-{% blocktrans trimmed with count=object.circuits.count %}
-  There are {count} circuits. Would you like to continue?
-{% endblocktrans %}
-```
-
-!!! warning
-    The `{% blocktrans %}` tag supports only **limited variable replacement**, comparable to the `format()` method on Python strings. It does not permit access to object attributes or the use of other template tags or filters inside it. Ensure that any necessary context is passed as simple variables.
-
-!!! info
-    The `{% trans %}` and `{% blocktrans %}` support the inclusion of contextual hints for translators using the `context` argument:
-
-    ```nohighlight
-    {% trans "May" context "month name" %}
-    ```

docs/development/models.md

@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-# NetBox Models
-
-## Model Types
-
-A NetBox model represents a discrete object type such as a device or IP address. Per [Django convention](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/db/models/), each model is defined as a Python class and has its own table in the PostgreSQL database. All NetBox data models can be categorized by type.
-
-The Django [content types](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/contrib/contenttypes/) framework is used to map Django models to database tables. A ContentType instance references a model by its `app_label` and `name`: For example, the Site model within the DCIM app is referred to as `dcim.site`. The content type combined with an object's primary key form a globally unique identifier for the object (e.g. `dcim.site:123`).
-
-### Features Matrix
-
-Depending on its classification, each NetBox model may support various features which enhance its operation. Each feature is enabled by inheriting from its designated mixin class, and some features also make use of the [application registry](./application-registry.md#model_features).
-
-| Feature                                                    | Feature Mixin           | Registry Key        | Description                                                                             |
-|------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------|---------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| [Bookmarks](../features/user-preferences.md#bookmarks)     | `BookmarksMixin`        | `bookmarks`         | These models can be bookmarked natively in the user interface                           |
-| [Change logging](../features/change-logging.md)            | `ChangeLoggingMixin`    | `change_logging`    | Changes to these objects are automatically recorded in the change log                   |
-| Cloning                                                    | `CloningMixin`          | `cloning`           | Provides the `clone()` method to prepare a copy                                         |
-| [Contacts](../features/contacts.md)                        | `ContactsMixin`         | `contacts`          | Contacts can be associated with these models                                            |
-| [Custom fields](../customization/custom-fields.md)         | `CustomFieldsMixin`     | `custom_fields`     | These models support the addition of user-defined fields                                |
-| [Custom links](../customization/custom-links.md)           | `CustomLinksMixin`      | `custom_links`      | These models support the assignment of custom links                                     |
-| [Custom validation](../customization/custom-validation.md) | `CustomValidationMixin` | -                   | Supports the enforcement of custom validation rules                                     |
-| [Event rules](../features/event-rules.md)                  | `EventRulesMixin`       | `event_rules`       | Event rules can send webhooks or run custom scripts automatically in response to events |
-| [Export templates](../customization/export-templates.md)   | `ExportTemplatesMixin`  | `export_templates`  | Users can create custom export templates for these models                               |
-| [Image attachments](../models/extras/imageattachment.md)   | `ImageAttachmentsMixin` | `image_attachments` | Image uploads can be attached to these models                                           |
-| [Jobs](../features/background-jobs.md)                     | `JobsMixin`             | `jobs`              | Background jobs can be scheduled for these models                                       |
-| [Journaling](../features/journaling.md)                    | `JournalingMixin`       | `journaling`        | These models support persistent historical commentary                                   |
-| [Notifications](../features/notifications.md)              | `NotificationsMixin`    | `notifications`     | These models support user notifications                                                 |
-| [Synchronized data](../integrations/synchronized-data.md)  | `SyncedDataMixin`       | `synced_data`       | Certain model data can be automatically synchronized from a remote data source          |
-| [Tagging](../models/extras/tag.md)                         | `TagsMixin`             | `tags`              | The models can be tagged with user-defined tags                                         |
-
-!!! note
-    The above listed features are supported natively by NetBox. Beginning with NetBox v4.4.0, plugins can register their own model features as well.
-
-## Models Index
-
-### Primary Models
-
-These are considered the "core" application models which are used to model network infrastructure.
-
-* [circuits.Circuit](../models/circuits/circuit.md)
-* [circuits.Provider](../models/circuits/provider.md)
-* [circuits.ProviderAccount](../models/circuits/provideraccount.md)
-* [circuits.ProviderNetwork](../models/circuits/providernetwork.md)
-* [core.DataFile](../models/core/datafile.md)
-* [core.DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md)
-* [core.Job](../models/core/job.md)
-* [dcim.Cable](../models/dcim/cable.md)
-* [dcim.Device](../models/dcim/device.md)
-* [dcim.DeviceType](../models/dcim/devicetype.md)
-* [dcim.Module](../models/dcim/module.md)
-* [dcim.ModuleType](../models/dcim/moduletype.md)
-* [dcim.PowerFeed](../models/dcim/powerfeed.md)
-* [dcim.PowerPanel](../models/dcim/powerpanel.md)
-* [dcim.Rack](../models/dcim/rack.md)
-* [dcim.RackReservation](../models/dcim/rackreservation.md)
-* [dcim.RackType](../models/dcim/racktype.md)
-* [dcim.Site](../models/dcim/site.md)
-* [dcim.VirtualChassis](../models/dcim/virtualchassis.md)
-* [dcim.VirtualDeviceContext](../models/dcim/virtualdevicecontext.md)
-* [ipam.Aggregate](../models/ipam/aggregate.md)
-* [ipam.ASN](../models/ipam/asn.md)
-* [ipam.FHRPGroup](../models/ipam/fhrpgroup.md)
-* [ipam.FHRPGroupAssignment](../models/ipam/fhrpgroupassignment.md)
-* [ipam.IPAddress](../models/ipam/ipaddress.md)
-* [ipam.IPRange](../models/ipam/iprange.md)
-* [ipam.Prefix](../models/ipam/prefix.md)
-* [ipam.RouteTarget](../models/ipam/routetarget.md)
-* [ipam.Service](../models/ipam/service.md)
-* [ipam.ServiceTemplate](../models/ipam/servicetemplate.md)
-* [ipam.VLAN](../models/ipam/vlan.md)
-* [ipam.VRF](../models/ipam/vrf.md)
-* [tenancy.Contact](../models/tenancy/contact.md)
-* [tenancy.Tenant](../models/tenancy/tenant.md)
-* [virtualization.Cluster](../models/virtualization/cluster.md)
-* [virtualization.VirtualMachine](../models/virtualization/virtualmachine.md)
-* [vpn.IKEPolicy](../models/vpn/ikepolicy.md)
-* [vpn.IKEProposal](../models/vpn/ikeproposal.md)
-* [vpn.IPSecPolicy](../models/vpn/ipsecpolicy.md)
-* [vpn.IPSecProfile](../models/vpn/ipsecprofile.md)
-* [vpn.IPSecProposal](../models/vpn/ipsecproposal.md)
-* [vpn.L2VPN](../models/vpn/l2vpn.md)
-* [vpn.Tunnel](../models/vpn/tunnel.md)
-* [wireless.WirelessLAN](../models/wireless/wirelesslan.md)
-* [wireless.WirelessLink](../models/wireless/wirelesslink.md)
-
-### Organizational Models
-
-Organization models are used to organize and classify primary models.
-
-* [circuits.CircuitGroup](../models/circuits/circuitgroup.md)
-* [circuits.CircuitType](../models/circuits/circuittype.md)
-* [dcim.DeviceRole](../models/dcim/devicerole.md)
-* [dcim.Manufacturer](../models/dcim/manufacturer.md)
-* [dcim.Platform](../models/dcim/platform.md)
-* [dcim.RackRole](../models/dcim/rackrole.md)
-* [ipam.ASNRange](../models/ipam/asnrange.md)
-* [ipam.RIR](../models/ipam/rir.md)
-* [ipam.Role](../models/ipam/role.md)
-* [ipam.VLANGroup](../models/ipam/vlangroup.md)
-* [tenancy.ContactRole](../models/tenancy/contactrole.md)
-* [virtualization.ClusterGroup](../models/virtualization/clustergroup.md)
-* [virtualization.ClusterType](../models/virtualization/clustertype.md)
-* [vpn.TunnelGroup](../models/vpn/tunnelgroup.md)
-
-### Nested Group Models
-
-Nested group models behave like organizational model, but self-nest within a recursive hierarchy. For example, the Region model can be used to represent a hierarchy of countries, states, and cities.
-
-* [dcim.Location](../models/dcim/location.md) (formerly RackGroup)
-* [dcim.Region](../models/dcim/region.md)
-* [dcim.SiteGroup](../models/dcim/sitegroup.md)
-* [tenancy.ContactGroup](../models/tenancy/contactgroup.md)
-* [tenancy.TenantGroup](../models/tenancy/tenantgroup.md)
-* [wireless.WirelessLANGroup](../models/wireless/wirelesslangroup.md)
-
-### Component Models
-
-Component models represent individual physical or virtual components belonging to a device or virtual machine.
-
-* [dcim.ConsolePort](../models/dcim/consoleport.md)
-* [dcim.ConsoleServerPort](../models/dcim/consoleserverport.md)
-* [dcim.DeviceBay](../models/dcim/devicebay.md)
-* [dcim.FrontPort](../models/dcim/frontport.md)
-* [dcim.Interface](../models/dcim/interface.md)
-* [dcim.InventoryItem](../models/dcim/inventoryitem.md)
-* [dcim.ModuleBay](../models/dcim/modulebay.md)
-* [dcim.PowerOutlet](../models/dcim/poweroutlet.md)
-* [dcim.PowerPort](../models/dcim/powerport.md)
-* [dcim.RearPort](../models/dcim/rearport.md)
-* [virtualization.VirtualDisk](../models/virtualization/virtualdisk.md)
-* [virtualization.VMInterface](../models/virtualization/vminterface.md)
-
-### Component Template Models
-
-These function as templates to effect the replication of device and virtual machine components. Component template models support a limited feature set, including change logging, custom validation, and event rules.
-
-* [dcim.ConsolePortTemplate](../models/dcim/consoleporttemplate.md)
-* [dcim.ConsoleServerPortTemplate](../models/dcim/consoleserverporttemplate.md)
-* [dcim.DeviceBayTemplate](../models/dcim/devicebaytemplate.md)
-* [dcim.FrontPortTemplate](../models/dcim/frontporttemplate.md)
-* [dcim.InterfaceTemplate](../models/dcim/interfacetemplate.md)
-* [dcim.InventoryItemTemplate](../models/dcim/inventoryitemtemplate.md)
-* [dcim.ModuleBayTemplate](../models/dcim/modulebaytemplate.md)
-* [dcim.PowerOutletTemplate](../models/dcim/poweroutlettemplate.md)
-* [dcim.PowerPortTemplate](../models/dcim/powerporttemplate.md)
-* [dcim.RearPortTemplate](../models/dcim/rearporttemplate.md)
-
-### Connection Models
-
-Connection models are used to model the connections, or connection endpoints between models.
-
-* [circuits.CircuitTermination](../models/circuits/circuittermination.md)
-* [vpn.TunnelTermination](../models/vpn/tunneltermination.md)

docs/development/release-checklist.md

@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-# Release Checklist
-
-This documentation describes the process of packaging and publishing a new NetBox release. There are three types of releases:
-
-* Major release (e.g. v3.7.8 to v4.0.0)
-* Minor release (e.g. v4.0.10 to v4.1.0)
-* Patch release (e.g. v4.1.0 to v4.1.1)
-
-While major releases generally introduce some very substantial changes to the application, they are typically treated the same as minor version increments for the purpose of release packaging.
-
-For patch releases (e.g. upgrading from v4.2.2 to v4.2.3), begin at the [patch releases](#patch-releases) heading below. For minor or major releases, complete the entire checklist.
-
-## Minor Version Releases
-
-### Address Constrained Dependencies
-
-Sometimes it becomes necessary to constrain dependencies to a particular version, e.g. to work around a bug in a newer release or to avoid a breaking change that we have yet to accommodate. (Another common example is to limit the upstream Django release.) For example:
-
-```
-# https://github.com/encode/django-rest-framework/issues/6053
-djangorestframework==3.8.1
-```
-
-These version constraints are added to `base_requirements.txt` to ensure that newer packages are not installed when updating the pinned dependencies in `requirements.txt` (see the [Update Requirements](#update-python-dependencies) section below). Before each new minor version of NetBox is released, all such constraints on dependent packages should be addressed if feasible. This guards against the collection of stale constraints over time.
-
-### Close the Release Milestone
-
-Close the [release milestone](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/milestones) on GitHub after ensuring there are no remaining open issues associated with it.
-
-### Update the Release Notes
-
-Check that a link to the release notes for the new version is present in the navigation menu (defined in `mkdocs.yml`), and that a summary of all major new features has been added to `docs/index.md`.
-
-### Update System Requirements
-
-If a new Django release is adopted or other major dependencies (Python, PostgreSQL, Redis) change:
-
-* Update the installation guide (`docs/installation/index.md`) with the new minimum versions.
-* Update the upgrade guide (`docs/installation/upgrading.md`) for the current version.
-    * Update the minimum versions for each dependency.
-    * Add a new row to the release history table. Bold any version changes for clarity.
-* Update the minimum PostgreSQL version in the programming error template (`netbox/templates/exceptions/programming_error.html`).
-* Update the minimum and supported Python versions in the project metadata file (`pyproject.toml`)
-
-### Manually Perform a New Install
-
-Start the documentation server and navigate to the current version of the installation docs:
-
-```no-highlight
-mkdocs serve
-```
-
-Follow these instructions to perform a new installation of NetBox in a temporary environment. This process must not be automated: The goal of this step is to catch any errors or omissions in the documentation and ensure that it is kept up to date for each release. Make any necessary changes to the documentation before proceeding with the release.
-
-### Test Upgrade Paths
-
-Upgrading from a previous version typically involves database migrations, which must work without errors.
-Test the following supported upgrade paths:
-
-- From one minor version to another within the same major version (e.g. 4.0 to 4.1).
-- From the latest patch version of the previous minor version (e.g. 3.7 to 4.0 or 4.1).
-
-Prior to release, test all these supported paths by loading demo data from the source version and performing:
-
-```no-highlight
-./manage.py migrate
-```
-
-### Merge the `feature` Branch
-
-Submit a pull request to merge the `feature` branch into the `main` branch in preparation for its release. Once it has been merged, continue with the section for the patch releases below.
-
-### Rebuild Demo Data (After Release)
-
-After the release of a new minor version, generate a new demo data snapshot compatible with the new release. See the [`netbox-demo-data`](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-demo-data) repository for instructions.
-
----
-
-## Patch Releases
-
-### Create a Release Branch
-
-Begin by creating a new branch (based on `main`) to effect the release. This will comprise the changes listed below.
-
-```
-git checkout main
-git checkout -B release-vX.Y.Z
-```
-
-### Notify netbox-docker Project of Any Relevant Changes
-
-Notify the [`netbox-docker`](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker) maintainers (in **#netbox-docker**) of any changes that may be relevant to their build process, including:
-
-* Significant changes to `upgrade.sh`
-* Increases in minimum versions for service dependencies (PostgreSQL, Redis, etc.)
-* Any changes to the reference installation
-
-### Update Python Dependencies
-
-Before each release, update each of NetBox's Python dependencies to its most recent stable version. These are defined in `requirements.txt`, which is updated from `base_requirements.txt` using `pip`. To do this:
-
-1. Upgrade the installed version of all required packages in your environment (`pip install -U -r base_requirements.txt`).
-2. Run all tests and check that the UI and API function as expected.
-3. Review each requirement's release notes for any breaking or otherwise noteworthy changes.
-4. Update the package versions in `requirements.txt` as appropriate.
-
-In cases where upgrading a dependency to its most recent release is breaking, it should be constrained to its current minor version in `base_requirements.txt` with an explanatory comment and revisited for the next major NetBox release (see the [Address Constrained Dependencies](#address-constrained-dependencies) section above).
-
-### Update UI Dependencies
-
-Check whether any UI dependencies (JavaScript packages, fonts, etc.) need to be updated by running `yarn outdated` from within the `project-static/` directory. [Upgrade these dependencies](./web-ui.md#updating-dependencies) as necessary, then run `yarn bundle` to generate the necessary files for distribution:
-
-```
-$ yarn bundle
-yarn run v1.22.19
-$ node bundle.js
-✅ Bundled source file 'styles/external.scss' to 'netbox-external.css'
-✅ Bundled source file 'styles/netbox.scss' to 'netbox.css'
-✅ Bundled source file 'styles/svg/rack_elevation.scss' to 'rack_elevation.css'
-✅ Bundled source file 'styles/svg/cable_trace.scss' to 'cable_trace.css'
-✅ Bundled source file 'index.ts' to 'netbox.js'
-✅ Copied graphiql files
-Done in 1.00s.
-```
-
-### Update & Compile Translations
-
-Updated language translations should be pulled from [Transifex](https://app.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/dashboard/) and re-compiled for each new release. First, retrieve any updated translation files using the Transifex CLI client:
-
-```no-highlight
-tx pull --force
-```
-
-Then, compile these portable (`.po`) files for use in the application:
-
-```no-highlight
-./manage.py compilemessages
-```
-
-!!! tip
-    Consult the translation documentation for more detail on [updating translated strings](./translations.md#updating-translated-strings) if you've not set up the Transifex client already.
-
-### Update Version and Changelog
-
-* Update the version number and published date in `netbox/release.yaml`. Add or remove the designation (e.g. `beta1`) if applicable.
-* Copy the version number from `release.yaml` to `pyproject.toml` in the project root.
-* Update the example version numbers in the feature request and bug report templates under `.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATES/`.
-* Add a section for this release at the top of the changelog page for the minor version (e.g. `docs/release-notes/version-4.2.md`) listing all relevant changes made in this release.
-
-!!! tip
-    Put yourself in the shoes of the user when recording change notes. Focus on the effect that each change has for the end user, rather than the specific bits of code that were modified in a PR. Ensure that each message conveys meaning absent context of the initial feature request or bug report. Remember to include keywords or phrases (such as exception names) that can be easily searched.
-
-### Rebuild the Device Type Definition Schema
-
-Run the following command to update the device type definition validation schema:
-
-```nohighlight
-./manage.py buildschema --write
-```
-
-This will automatically update the schema file at `contrib/generated_schema.json`.
-
-### Update the OpenAPI Schema
-
-Update the static OpenAPI schema definition at `contrib/openapi.json` with the management command below. If the schema file is up-to-date, only the NetBox version will be changed.
-
-```nohighlight
-./manage.py spectacular --format openapi-json > ../contrib/openapi.json
-```
-
-### Submit a Pull Request
-
-Commit the above changes and submit a pull request titled **"Release vX.Y.Z"** to merge the current release branch (e.g. `release-vX.Y.Z`) into `main`. Copy the documented release notes into the pull request's body.
-
-Once CI has completed and a colleague has reviewed the PR, merge it. This effects a new release in the `main` branch.
-
-!!! warning
-    To ensure a streamlined review process, the pull request for a release **must** be limited to the changes outlined in this document. A release PR must never include functional changes to the application: Any unrelated "cleanup" needs to be captured in a separate PR prior to the release being shipped.
-
-### Create a New Release
-
-Create a [new release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases/new) on GitHub with the following parameters.
-
-* **Tag:** Current version (e.g. `v4.2.1`)
-* **Target:** `main`
-* **Title:** Version and date (e.g. `v4.2.1 - 2025-01-17`)
-* **Description:** Copy from the pull request body, then promote the `###` headers to `##` ones
-
-Once created, the release will become available for users to install.

docs/development/search.md

@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-# Search
-
-NetBox v3.4 introduced a new global search mechanism, which employs the `extras.CachedValue` model to store discrete field values from many models in a single table.
-
-## SearchIndex
-
-To enable search support for a model, declare and register a subclass of `netbox.search.SearchIndex` for it. Typically, this will be done within an app's `search.py` module.
-
-```python
-from netbox.search import SearchIndex, register_search
-
-@register_search
-class MyModelIndex(SearchIndex):
-    model = MyModel
-    fields = (
-        ('name', 100),
-        ('description', 500),
-        ('comments', 5000),
-    )
-    display_attrs = ('site', 'device', 'status', 'description')
-```
-
-A SearchIndex subclass defines both its model and a list of two-tuples specifying which model fields to be indexed and the weight (precedence) associated with each. Guidance on weight assignment for fields is provided below.
-
-### Field Weight Guidance
-
-| Weight | Field Role                                       | Examples                                           |
-|--------|--------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|
-| 50     | Unique serialized attribute                      | Device.asset_tag                                   |
-| 60     | Unique serialized attribute (per related object) | Device.serial                                      |
-| 100    | Primary human identifier                         | Device.name, Circuit.cid, Cable.label              |
-| 110    | Slug                                             | Site.slug                                          |
-| 200    | Secondary identifier                             | ProviderAccount.account, DeviceType.part_number    |
-| 300    | Highly unique descriptive attribute              | CircuitTermination.xconnect_id, IPAddress.dns_name |
-| 500    | Description                                      | Site.description                                   |
-| 1000   | Custom field default                             | -                                                  |
-| 2000   | Other discrete attribute                         | CircuitTermination.port_speed                      |
-| 5000   | Comment field                                    | Site.comments                                      |

docs/development/signals.md

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-# Signals
-
-In addition to [Django's built-in signals](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/signals/), NetBox defines some of its own, listed below.
-
-## post_clean
-
-This signal is sent by models which inherit from `CustomValidationMixin` at the end of their `clean()` method.
-
-### Receivers
-
-* `extras.signals.run_custom_validators()`
-
-## core.job_start
-
-This signal is sent whenever a [background job](../features/background-jobs.md) is started.
-
-### Receivers
-
-* `extras.signals.process_job_start_event_rules()`
-
-## core.job_end
-
-This signal is sent whenever a [background job](../features/background-jobs.md) is terminated.
-
-### Receivers
-
-* `extras.signals.process_job_end_event_rules()`
-
-## core.pre_sync
-
-This signal is sent when the [DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md) model's `sync()` method is called.
-
-## core.post_sync
-
-This signal is sent when a [DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md) finishes synchronizing.

docs/development/style-guide.md

@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-# Style Guide
-
-NetBox generally follows the [Django style guide](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/internals/contributing/writing-code/coding-style/), which is itself based on [PEP 8](https://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/). [ruff](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/) is used for linting (with certain [exceptions](#linter-exceptions)).
-
-## Code
-
-### General Guidance
-
-* When in doubt, remain consistent: It is better to be consistently incorrect than inconsistently correct. If you notice in the course of unrelated work a pattern that should be corrected, continue to follow the pattern for now and submit a separate bug report so that the entire code base can be evaluated at a later point.
-
-* Prioritize readability over concision. Python is a very flexible language that typically offers several multiple options for expressing a given piece of logic, but some may be more friendly to the reader than others. (List comprehensions are particularly vulnerable to over-optimization.) Always remain considerate of the future reader who may need to interpret your code without the benefit of the context within which you are writing it.
-
-* Include a newline at the end of every file.
-
-* No easter eggs. While they can be fun, NetBox must be considered as a business-critical tool. The potential, however minor, for introducing a bug caused by unnecessary code is best avoided entirely.
-
-* Constants (variables which do not change) should be declared in `constants.py` within each app. Wildcard imports from the file are acceptable.
-
-* Every model must have a [docstring](https://peps.python.org/pep-0257/). Every custom method should include an explanation of its function.
-
-* Nested API serializers generate minimal representations of an object. These are stored separately from the primary serializers to avoid circular dependencies. Always import nested serializers from other apps directly. For example, from within the DCIM app you would write `from ipam.api.nested_serializers import NestedIPAddressSerializer`.
-
-### Linting
-
-The [ruff](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/) linter is used to enforce code style, and is run automatically by [pre-commit](./getting-started.md#5-install-pre-commit). To invoke `ruff` manually, run:
-
-```
-ruff check netbox/
-```
-
-#### Linter Exceptions
-
-The following rules are ignored when linting.
-
-##### [E501](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/line-too-long/): Line too long
-
-NetBox does not enforce a hard restriction on line length, although a maximum length of 120 characters is strongly encouraged for Python code where possible. The maximum length does not apply to HTML templates or to automatically generated code (e.g. database migrations).
-
-##### [F403](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/undefined-local-with-import-star/): Undefined local with import star
-
-Wildcard imports (for example, `from .constants import *`) are acceptable under any of the following conditions:
-
-* The library being import contains only constant declarations (e.g. `constants.py`)
-* The library being imported explicitly defines `__all__`
-
-##### [F405](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/undefined-local-with-import-star-usage/): Undefined local with import star usage
-
-The justification for ignoring this rule is the same as F403 above.
-
-### Introducing New Dependencies
-
-The introduction of a new dependency is best avoided unless it is absolutely necessary. For small features, it's generally preferable to replicate functionality within the NetBox code base rather than to introduce reliance on an external project. This reduces both the burden of tracking new releases and our exposure to outside bugs and supply chain attacks.
-
-If there's a strong case for introducing a new dependency, it must meet the following criteria:
-
-* Its complete source code must be published and freely accessible without registration.
-* Its license must be conducive to inclusion in an open source project.
-* It must be actively maintained, with no longer than one year between releases.
-* It must be available via the [Python Package Index](https://pypi.org/) (PyPI).
-
-When adding a new dependency, a short description of the package and the URL of its code repository must be added to `base_requirements.txt`. Additionally, a line specifying the package name pinned to the current stable release must be added to `requirements.txt`. This ensures that NetBox will install only the known-good release.
-
-## Written Works
-
-### General Guidance
-
-* Written material must always meet a reasonable professional standard, with proper grammar, spelling, and punctuation.
-
-* Use two line breaks between paragraphs.
-
-* Use only a single space between sentences.
-
-* All documentation is to be written in [Markdown](../reference/markdown.md), with modest amounts of HTML permitted where needed to overcome technical limitations.
-
-### Branding
-
-* When referring to NetBox in writing, use the proper form "NetBox," with the letters N and B capitalized. The lowercase form "netbox" should be used in code, filenames, etc. but never "Netbox" or any other deviation.
-
-* There are SVG forms of the NetBox logo for both [light mode](../netbox_logo_light.svg) and [dark mode](../netbox_logo_dark.svg) available. It is preferred to use the SVG logo for all purposes as it scales to arbitrary sizes without loss of resolution. If a raster image is required, the SVG logo should be converted to a PNG image of the desired size.

docs/development/translations.md

@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-# Translations
-
-NetBox coordinates all translation work using the [Transifex](https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/) platform. Signing up for a Transifex account is free.
-
-All language translations in NetBox are generated from the source file found at `netbox/translations/en/LC_MESSAGES/django.po`. This file contains the original English strings with empty mappings, and is generated as part of NetBox's release process. Transifex updates source strings from this file on a recurring basis, so new translation strings will appear in the platform automatically as it is updated in the code base.
-
-Reviewers log into Transifex and navigate to their designated language(s) to translate strings. The initial translation for most strings will be machine-generated via the AWS Translate service. Human reviewers are responsible for reviewing these translations and making corrections where necessary.
-
-## Updating Translation Sources
-
-To update the English `.po` file from which all translations are derived, use the `makemessages` management command (ignoring the `project-static/` directory):
-
-```nohighlight
-./manage.py makemessages -l en -i "project-static/*"
-```
-
-Then, commit the change and push to the `main` branch on GitHub. Any new strings will appear for translation on Transifex automatically.
-
-!!! note
-    It is typically not necessary to update source strings manually, as this is done nightly by a [GitHub action](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/.github/workflows/update-translation-strings.yml).
-
-## Updating Translated Strings
-
-Typically, translated strings need to be updated only as part of the NetBox [release process](./release-checklist.md).
-
-Check the Transifex dashboard for languages that are not marked _ready for use_, being sure to click _Show all languages_ if it appears at the bottom of the list. Use machine translation to round out any not-ready languages. It's not necessary to review the machine translation immediately as the translation teams will handle that aspect; the goal at this stage is to get translations included in the Transifex pull request.
-
-To download translated strings automatically, you'll need to:
-
-1. Install the [Transifex CLI client](https://github.com/transifex/cli)
-2. Generate a [Transifex API token](https://app.transifex.com/user/settings/api/)
-
-Once you have the client set up, run the following command from the project root (e.g. `/opt/netbox/`):
-
-```no-highlight
-TX_TOKEN=$TOKEN tx pull --force
-```
-
-This will download all portable (`.po`) translation files from Transifex, updating them locally as needed. (The `--force` argument instructs the client to disregard the timestamps of local translation files.)
-
-Once retrieved, the updated strings need to be compiled into new `.mo` files so they can be used by the application. Run Django's [`compilemessages`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/django-admin/#django-admin-compilemessages) management command to compile them:
-
-```no-highlight
-./manage.py compilemessages
-```
-
-Once any new `.mo` files have been generated, they need to be committed and pushed back up to GitHub. (Again, this is typically done as part of publishing a new NetBox release.)
-
-!!! tip
-    Run `git status` to check that both `*.mo` & `*.po` files have been updated as expected.
-
-## Proposing New Languages
-
-If you'd like to add support for a new language to NetBox, the first step is to [submit a GitHub issue](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+translation&projects=&template=translation.yaml) to capture the proposal. While we'd like to add as many languages as possible, we do need to limit the rate at which new languages are added. New languages will be selected according to community interest and the number of volunteers who sign up as translators.
-
-Once a proposed language has been approved, a NetBox maintainer will:
-
-* Add it to the Transifex platform
-* Designate one or more reviewers
-* Create the initial machine-generated translations for review
-* Add it to the list of supported languages

docs/development/user-preferences.md

@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-# User Preferences
-
-The `users.UserConfig` model holds individual preferences for each user in the form of JSON data. This page serves as a manifest of all recognized user preferences in NetBox.
-
-For end‑user guidance on resetting saved table layouts, see [Features > User Preferences](../features/user-preferences.md#clearing-table-preferences).
-
-## Available Preferences
-
-| Name                       | Description                                                   |
-|----------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `csv_delimiter`            | The delimiting character used when exporting CSV data         |
-| `data_format`              | Preferred format when rendering raw data (JSON or YAML)       |
-| `locale.language`          | The language selected for UI translation                      |
-| `pagination.per_page`      | The number of items to display per page of a paginated table  |
-| `pagination.placement`     | Where to display the paginator controls relative to the table |
-| `tables.${table}.columns`  | The ordered list of columns to display when viewing the table |
-| `tables.${table}.ordering` | A list of column names by which the table should be ordered   |
-| `ui.copilot_enabled`       | Toggles the NetBox Copilot AI agent                           |
-| `ui.tables.striping`       | Toggles visual striping of tables in the UI                   |

docs/development/utility-views.md

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+# Utility Views
+
+Utility views are reusable views that handle common CRUD tasks, such as listing and updating objects. Some views operate on individual objects, whereas others (referred to as "bulk" views) operate on multiple objects at once.
+
+## Individual Views
+
+### ObjectListView
+
+Generates a paginated table of objects from a given queryset, which may optionally be filtered.
+
+### ObjectEditView
+
+Updates an object identified by a primary key (PK) or slug. If no existing object is specified, a new object will be created.
+
+### ObjectDeleteView
+
+Deletes an object. The user is redirected to a confirmation page before the deletion is executed.
+
+## Bulk Views
+
+### BulkCreateView
+
+Creates multiple objects at once based on a given pattern. Currently used only for IP addresses.
+
+### BulkImportView
+
+Accepts CSV-formatted data and creates a new object for each line. Creation is all-or-none.
+
+### BulkEditView
+
+Applies changes to multiple objects at once in a two-step operation. First, the list of PKs for selected objects is POSTed and an edit form is presented to the user. On submission of that form, the specified changes are made to all selected objects.
+
+### BulkDeleteView
+
+Deletes multiple objects. The user selects the objects to be deleted and confirms the deletion.
+
+## Component Views
+
+### ComponentCreateView
+
+Create one or more component objects beloning to a parent object (e.g. interfaces attached to a device).
+
+### ComponentEditView
+
+A subclass of `ObjectEditView`: Updates an individual component object.
+
+### ComponentDeleteView
+
+A subclass of `ObjectDeleteView`: Deletes an individual component object.
+
+### BulkComponentCreateView
+
+Create a set of components objects for each of a selected set of parent objects. This view can be used e.g. to create multiple interfaces on multiple devices at once.

docs/development/web-ui.md

@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-# Web UI Development
-
-## Code Structure
-
-Most static resources for the NetBox UI are housed within the `netbox/project-static/` directory.
-
-| Path      | Description                                        |
-|-----------|----------------------------------------------------|
-| `dist/`   | Destination path for installed dependencies        |
-| `docs/`   | Local build path for documentation                 |
-| `img/`    | Image files                                        |
-| `js/`     | Miscellaneous JavaScript resources served directly |
-| `src/`    | TypeScript resources (to be compiled into JS)      |
-| `styles/` | Sass resources (to be compiled into CSS)           |
-
-## Front End Technologies
-
-Front end scripting is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org/), which is a strongly-typed extension to JavaScript. TypeScript is "transpiled" into JavaScript resources which are served to and executed by the client web browser.
-
-All UI styling is written in [Sass](https://sass-lang.com/), which is an extension to browser-native [Cascading Stylesheets (CSS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS). Similar to how TypeScript content is transpiled to JavaScript, Sass resources (`.scss` files) are compiled to CSS.
-
-## Dependencies
-
-The following software is employed by the NetBox user interface.
-
-* [Bootstrap 5](https://getbootstrap.com/) - A popular CSS & JS framework
-* [clipboard.js](https://clipboardjs.com/) - A lightweight package for enabling copy-to-clipboard functionality
-* [flatpickr](https://flatpickr.js.org/) - A lightweight date & time selection widget
-* [gridstack.js](https://gridstackjs.com/) - Enables interactive grid layouts (for the dashboard)
-* [HTMX](https://htmx.org/) - Enables dynamic web interfaces through the use of HTML element attributes
-* [Material Design Icons](https://pictogrammers.com/library/mdi/) - An extensive open source collection of graphical icons, delivered as a web font
-* [query-string](https://www.npmjs.com/package/query-string) - Assists with parsing URL query strings
-* [Tabler](https://tabler.io/) - A web application UI toolkit & theme based on Bootstrap 5
-* [Tom Select](https://tom-select.js.org/) - Provides dynamic selection form fields
-
-## Guidance
-
-NetBox generally follows the following guidelines for front-end code:
-
-- Bootstrap utility classes may be used to solve one-off issues or to implement singular components, as long as the class list does not exceed 4-5 classes. If an element needs more than 5 utility classes, a custom SCSS class should be added that contains the required style properties.
-- Custom classes must be commented, explaining the general purpose of the class and where it is used.
-- Reuse SCSS variables whenever possible. CSS values should (almost) never be hard-coded.
-- All TypeScript functions must have, at a minimum, a basic [JSDoc](https://jsdoc.app/) description of what the function is for and where it is used. If possible, document all function arguments via [`@param` JSDoc block tags](https://jsdoc.app/tags-param.html).
-- Expanding on NetBox's [dependency policy](style-guide.md#introducing-new-dependencies), new front-end dependencies should be avoided unless absolutely necessary. Every new front-end dependency adds to the CSS/JavaScript file size that must be loaded by the client and this should be minimized as much as possible. If adding a new dependency is unavoidable, use a tool like [Bundlephobia](https://bundlephobia.com/) to ensure the smallest possible library is used.
-- All UI elements must be usable on all common screen sizes, including mobile devices. Be sure to test newly implemented solutions (JavaScript included) on as many screen sizes and device types as possible.
-- NetBox aligns with Bootstrap's [supported Browsers and Devices](https://getbootstrap.com/docs/5.1/getting-started/browsers-devices/) list.
-
-## UI Development
-
-To contribute to the NetBox UI, you'll need to review the main [Getting Started guide](getting-started.md) in order to set up your base environment.
-
-### Tools
-
-Once you have a working NetBox development environment, you'll need to install a few more tools to work with the NetBox UI:
-
-- [NodeJS](https://nodejs.org/en/download/) (the LTS release should suffice)
-- [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com/getting-started/install) (version 1)
-
-After Node and Yarn are installed on your system, you'll need to install all the NetBox UI dependencies:
-
-```console
-$ cd netbox/project-static
-$ yarn
-```
-
-!!! warning "Check Your Working Directory"
-    You need to be in the `netbox/project-static` directory to run the below `yarn` commands.
-
-### Updating Dependencies
-
-Run `yarn outdated` to identify outdated dependencies.
-
-```
-$ yarn outdated
-yarn outdated v1.22.19
-info Color legend :
- "<red>"    : Major Update backward-incompatible updates
- "<yellow>" : Minor Update backward-compatible features
- "<green>"  : Patch Update backward-compatible bug fixes
-Package                          Current Wanted  Latest Workspace Package Type    URL
-bootstrap                        5.3.1   5.3.1   5.3.3  netbox    dependencies    https://getbootstrap.com/
-```
-
-Run `yarn upgrade --latest` to automatically upgrade these packages to their most recent versions.
-
-```
-$ yarn upgrade bootstrap --latest
-yarn upgrade v1.22.19
-[1/4] Resolving packages...
-[2/4] Fetching packages...
-[3/4] Linking dependencies...
-[4/4] Rebuilding all packages...
-success Saved lockfile.
-success Saved 1 new dependency.
-info Direct dependencies
-└─ bootstrap@5.3.3
-info All dependencies
-└─ bootstrap@5.3.3
-Done in 0.95s.
-```
-
-`package.json` will be updated to reflect the new package versions automatically.
-
-### Bundling
-
-In order for the TypeScript and Sass (SCSS) source files to be usable by a browser, they must first be transpiled (TypeScript → JavaScript, Sass → CSS), bundled, and minified. After making changes to TypeScript or Sass source files, run `yarn bundle`.
-
-`yarn bundle` is a wrapper around the following subcommands, any of which can be run individually:
-
-| Command               | Action                                          |
-| :-------------------- | :---------------------------------------------- |
-| `yarn bundle`         | Bundle TypeScript and Sass (SCSS) source files. |
-| `yarn bundle:styles`  | Bundle Sass (SCSS) source files only.           |
-| `yarn bundle:scripts` | Bundle TypeScript source files only.            |
-
-All output files will be written to `netbox/project-static/dist`, where Django will pick them up when `manage.py collectstatic` is run.
-
-!!! info "Remember to re-run `manage.py collectstatic`"
-    If you're running the development web server — `manage.py runserver` — you'll need to run `manage.py collectstatic` to see your changes.
-
-### Linting, Formatting & Type Checking
-
-Before committing any changes to TypeScript files, and periodically throughout the development process, you should run `yarn validate` to catch formatting, code quality, or type errors.
-
-!!! tip "IDE Integrations"
-    If you're using an IDE, it is strongly recommended to install [ESLint](https://eslint.org/docs/user-guide/integrations), [TypeScript](https://github.com/Microsoft/TypeScript/wiki/TypeScript-Editor-Support), and [Prettier](https://prettier.io/docs/en/editors.html) integrations, if available. Most of them will automatically check and/or correct issues in the code as you develop, which can significantly increase your productivity as a contributor.
-
-`yarn validate` is a wrapper around the following subcommands, any of which can be run individually:
-
-| Command                            | Action                                                           |
-| :--------------------------------- | :--------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `yarn validate`                    | Run all validation.                                              |
-| `yarn validate:lint`               | Validate TypeScript code via [ESLint](https://eslint.org/) only. |
-| `yarn validate:types`              | Validate TypeScript code compilation only.                       |
-| `yarn validate:formatting`         | Validate code formatting of JavaScript & Sass/SCSS files.        |
-| `yarn validate:formatting:styles`  | Validate code formatting Sass/SCSS only.                         |
-| `yarn validate:formatting:scripts` | Validate code formatting TypeScript only.                        |
-
-You can also run the following commands to automatically fix formatting issues:
-
-| Command               | Action                                          |
-| :-------------------- | :---------------------------------------------- |
-| `yarn format`         | Format TypeScript and Sass (SCSS) source files. |
-| `yarn format:styles`  | Format Sass (SCSS) source files only.           |
-| `yarn format:scripts` | Format TypeScript source files only.            |
-

docs/extra.css

@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-/* Images */
-img {
-    display: block;
-    margin-left: auto;
-    margin-right: auto;
-}
-
-.md-content img {
-    background-color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.64);
-}
-
-/* Tables */
-table {
-    margin-bottom: 24px;
-    width: 100%;
-}
-th {
-    padding: 6px;
-    font-weight: bold;
-}
-td {
-    padding: 6px;
-}
-/* Remove table header coloring.  */
-.md-typeset table:not([class]) th {
-    color: unset !important;
-    background-color: unset !important;
-}
-thead tr {
-    /* Colorize table headers. */
-    background-color: var(--md-code-bg-color);
-    color: var(--md-code-fg-color);
-}

docs/features/api-integration.md

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-# API & Integration
-
-NetBox includes a slew of features which enable integration with other tools and resources powering your network.
-
-## REST API
-
-NetBox's REST API, powered by the [Django REST Framework](https://www.django-rest-framework.org/), provides a robust yet accessible interface for creating, modifying, and deleting objects. Employing HTTP for transfer and JSON for data encapsulation, the REST API is easily consumed by clients on any platform and extremely well suited for automation tasks.
-
-```no-highlight
-curl -s -X POST \
--H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
--H "Content-Type: application/json" \
-http://netbox/api/ipam/prefixes/ \
---data '{"prefix": "192.0.2.0/24", "site": {"name": "Branch 12"}}'
-```
-
-The REST API employs token-based authentication, which maps API clients to user accounts and their assigned permissions. The API endpoints are fully documented using OpenAPI, and NetBox even includes a convenient browser-based version of the API for exploration. The open source [pynetbox](https://github.com/netbox-community/pynetbox) and [go-netbox](https://github.com/netbox-community/go-netbox) API client libraries are also available for Python and Go, respectively.
-
-To learn more about this feature, check out the [REST API documentation](../integrations/rest-api.md).
-
-## GraphQL API
-
-NetBox also provides a [GraphQL](https://graphql.org/) API to complement its REST API. GraphQL enables complex queries for arbitrary objects and fields, enabling the client to retrieve only the specific data it needs from NetBox. This is a special-purpose read-only API intended for efficient queries. Like the REST API, the GraphQL API employs token-based authentication.
-
-To learn more about this feature, check out the [GraphQL API documentation](../integrations/graphql-api.md).
-
-## Webhooks
-
-A webhook is a mechanism for conveying to some external system a change that has taken place in NetBox. For example, you may want to notify a monitoring system whenever the status of a device is updated in NetBox. To do this, first create a [webhook](../models/extras/webhook.md) identifying the remote receiver (URL), HTTP method, and any other necessary parameters. Then, define an [event rule](../models/extras/eventrule.md) which is triggered by device changes to transmit the webhook.
-
-When NetBox detects a change to a device, an HTTP request containing the details of the change and who made it be sent to the specified receiver. Webhooks are an excellent mechanism for building event-based automation processes. To learn more about this feature, check out the [webhooks documentation](../integrations/webhooks.md).
-
-## Prometheus Metrics
-
-NetBox includes a special `/metrics` view which exposes metrics for a [Prometheus](https://prometheus.io/) scraper, powered by the open source [django-prometheus](https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus) library. To learn more about this feature, check out the [Prometheus metrics documentation](../integrations/prometheus-metrics.md).

docs/features/authentication-permissions.md

@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-# Authentication & Permissions
-
-## Object-Based Permissions
-
-NetBox boasts a very robust permissions system which extends well beyond the model-based permissions of the underlying Django framework. Assigning permissions in NetBox involves several dimensions:
-
-* The type(s) of object to which the permission applies
-* The users and/or groups being granted the permissions
-* The action(s) permitted by the permission (e.g. view, add, change, etc.)
-* Any constraints limiting application of the permission to a particular subset of objects
-
-The implementation of constrains is what enables NetBox administrators to assign per-object permissions: Users can be limited to viewing or interacting with arbitrary subsets of objects based on the objects' attributes. For example, you might restrict a particular user to viewing only those prefixes or IP addresses within a particular VRF. Or you might restrict a group to modifying devices within a particular region.
-
-Permission constraints are declared in JSON format when creating a permission, and operate very similarly to Django ORM queries. For instance, here's a constraint that matches reserved VLANs with a VLAN ID between 100 and 199:
-
-```json
-[
-  {
-    "vid__gte": 100,
-    "vid__lt": 200
-  },
-  {
-    "status": "reserved"
-  }
-]
-```
-
-Check out the [permissions documentation](../administration/permissions.md) for more information about permission constraints.
-
-## LDAP Authentication
-
-NetBox includes a built-in authentication backend for authenticating users against a remote LDAP server. The [installation documentation](../installation/6-ldap.md) provides more detail on this capability.
-
-## Single Sign-On (SSO)
-
-NetBox integrates with the open source [python-social-auth](https://github.com/python-social-auth) library to provide [myriad options](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/backends/index.html#supported-backends) for single sign-on (SSO) authentication. These include:
-
-* Cognito
-* GitHub & GitHub Enterprise
-* GitLab
-* Google
-* Hashicorp Vault
-* Keycloak
-* Microsoft Entra ID
-* Microsoft Graph
-* Okta
-* OIDC
-
-...and many others. It's also possible to build your own custom backends as needed using python-social-auth's base OAuth, OpenID, and SAML classes. You can find some examples of configuring SSO in NetBox' [authentication documentation](../administration/authentication/overview.md).

docs/features/background-jobs.md

@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-# Background Jobs
-
-NetBox includes the ability to execute certain functions as background tasks. These include:
-
-* [Custom script](../customization/custom-scripts.md) execution
-* Synchronization of [remote data sources](../integrations/synchronized-data.md)
-* Housekeeping tasks
-
-Additionally, NetBox plugins can enqueue their own background tasks. This is accomplished using the [Job model](../models/core/job.md). Background tasks are executed by the `rqworker` process(es).
-
-## Scheduled Jobs
-
-Background jobs can be configured to run immediately, or at a set time in the future. Scheduled jobs can also be configured to repeat at a set interval.

docs/features/change-logging.md

@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-# Change Logging
-
-Every time an object in NetBox is created, updated, or deleted, a serialized copy of that object taken both before and after the change is saved to the database, along with metadata including the current time and the user associated with the change. These records form a persistent record of changes both for each individual object as well as NetBox as a whole. The global change log can be viewed by navigating to Other > Change Log.
-
-A serialized representation of the instance being modified is included in JSON format. This is similar to how objects are conveyed within the REST API, but does not include any nested representations. For instance, the `tenant` field of a site will record only the tenant's ID, not a representation of the tenant.
-
-When a request is made, a UUID is generated and attached to any change records resulting from that request. For example, editing three objects in bulk will create a separate change record for each  (three in total), and each of those objects will be associated with the same UUID. This makes it easy to identify all the change records resulting from a particular request.
-
-Change records are exposed in the API via the read-only endpoint `/api/extras/object-changes/`. They may also be exported via the web UI in CSV format.
-
-## User Messages
-
-!!! info "This feature was introduced in NetBox v4.4."
-
-When creating, modifying, or deleting an object in NetBox, a user has the option of recording an arbitrary message that will appear in the change record. This can be helpful to capture additional context, such as the reason for the change.
-
-## Correlating Changes by Request
-
-Every request made to NetBox is assigned a random unique ID that can be used to correlate change records. For example, if you change the status of three sites using the UI's bulk edit feature, you will see three new change records (one for each site) all referencing the same request ID. This shows that all three changes were made as part of the same request.

docs/features/circuits.md

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-# Circuits
-
-NetBox is ideal for managing your network's transit and peering providers and circuits. It provides all the flexibility needed to model physical circuits in both data center and enterprise environments, and allows for "connecting" circuits directly to device interfaces via cables.
-
-```mermaid
-flowchart TD
-    ASN --> Provider
-    Provider --> ProviderNetwork & ProviderAccount & Circuit
-    ProviderAccount --> Circuit
-    CircuitType --> Circuit
-
-click ASN "../../models/circuits/asn/"
-click Circuit "../../models/circuits/circuit/"
-click CircuitType "../../models/circuits/circuittype/"
-click Provider "../../models/circuits/provider/"
-click ProviderAccount "../../models/circuits/provideraccount/"
-click ProviderNetwork "../../models/circuits/providernetwork/"
-```
-
-## Providers
-
-A provider is any organization which provides Internet or private connectivity. Typically, these are large carriers, however they might also include regional providers or even internal services. Each provider can be assigned account and contact details, and may have one or more AS numbers assigned to it.
-
-Sometimes you'll need to model provider networks into which you don't have full visibility; these are typically represented on topology diagrams with cloud icons. NetBox facilitates this through its provider network model: A provider network represents a "black box" network to which your circuits can connect. A common example is a provider MPLS network connecting multiple sites.
-
-## Circuits
-
-A circuit is a physical connection between two points, which is installed and maintained by an external provider. For example, an Internet connection delivered as a fiber optic cable would be modeled as a circuit in NetBox.
-
-Each circuit is associated with a provider and assigned a circuit ID, which must be unique to that provider. A circuit is also assigned a user-defined type, operational status, and various other operating characteristics. Provider accounts can also be employed to further categorize circuits belonging to a common provider: These may represent different business units or technologies.
-
-Each circuit may have up to two terminations (A and Z) defined. Each termination can be associated with a particular site or provider network. In the case of the former, a cable can be connected between the circuit termination and a device component to map its physical connectivity.
-
-!!! warning "Physical vs. Virtual Circuits"
-    The circuit model in NetBox represents **physical** connections. Don't confuse these with _virtual_ circuits which may be offered by providers overlaid on physical infrastructure. (For example, a VLAN-tagged subinterface would be a virtual circuit.) A good rule of thumb: If you can't point to it, it's not a physical circuit.